iai linear servo_actuator_catalog

67
Wide-ranging Lineup to Support Small to Large Systems Linear Servo Actuator ELECTROMATE Toll Free Phone (877) SERVO98 Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099 www.electromate.com [email protected] Sold & Serviced By:

Upload: electromate

Post on 12-Jul-2015

78 views

Category:

Technology


1 download

TRANSCRIPT

Catalog No. CJ0094-3A-UST-2-1108

Notes on Use

◆ This product uses high-performance rare earth permanent magnet. Accordingly, the product may cause malfunction of a pacemaker or other medical device implanted in the human body. If you are using a pacemaker or other implanted medical device, do not come near this product. Also take note that bringing a mobile phone, watch, cash card or other precision device closer to the magnet part of this product may cause damage to the device.

◆ When installing this product, make sure the environment satisfies the following conditions:Not exposed to direct sunlight / The machine does not receive irradiated heat from a large heat source such as a heat treatment oven / Ambient temperature is in a range of 0 to 40°C / Ambient humidity is 85% or below / Dews do not form / Free from corrosive or flammable gases / Not subject to significant dust / Free from oil mist or splashed cutting fluid / Not subject to vibration exceeding 0.3 G / Not exposed to significant electromagnetic waves, ultraviolet ray or radiation

◆ When handling this product, take note that exerting an excessive force on the stainless sheet at the top of the product may damage the stainless sheet. The product may also get damaged if dropped or struck. Handle the product with due care.

◆ This product cannot be used in a vertical position or to perform push-motion operation.

w w w . i n t e l l i g e n t a c t u a t o r . c o m

Home page: www.intelligentactuator.comThe information contained in this catalog is subject to change without notice for the purpose of product improvement.

Headquarters: 2690 W. 237th Street Torrance, CA 90505Chicago Office: 1261 Hamilton Parkway Itasca, IL 60143Atlanta Office: 1220 Kennestone Circle, Suite E Marietta, GA 30066

Wide-ranging

Lineup to

Support Small

to Large

Systems

Linear Servo Actuator

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

A Full Lineup of Models Meeting Various Applications

Maximum speed of 2,500 mm/sec, maximum acceleration/deceleration of 3 G, maximum payload of 120 kg, and maximum stroke of 4 m.

● Compact, lightweight shaft type● Small type with flat motor achieving high thrust with a slim body● Flat type ideal for vertically confined space●Medium type boasting high moment rigidity● Large type capable of transferring a maximum load of 120 kg over 4 m

Select from three types of controllers. Controllers supporting

three different control modes—positioner, pulse-train and program—are available.

A new multi-slider collision prevention function has been added to the SSEL/XSEL controller series.

1 2

1-axis/2-axis program controllerachieving high cost performance

1-axis controller capable of operating actuators in the positioner mode and pulse-train mode

High-performance program controllercapable of controlling up to six axesat the same time

N E W N E W

Shaft type

Shaft type

Shaft type

Small type

Flat type

Medium type

Large type

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

A Full Lineup of Models Meeting Various Applications

Maximum speed of 2,500 mm/sec, maximum acceleration/deceleration of 3 G, maximum payload of 120 kg, and maximum stroke of 4 m.

● Compact, lightweight shaft type● Small type with flat motor achieving high thrust with a slim body ● Flat type ideal for vertically confined space ● Medium type boasting high moment rigidity● Large type capable of transferring a maximum load of 120 kg over 4 m

Select from three types of controllers. Controllers supporting

three different control modes—positioner, pulse-train and program—are available.

A new multi-slider collision prevention function has been added to the SSEL/XSEL controller series.

1 2

1-axis/2-axis program controller achieving high cost performance

1-axis controller capable of operating actuators in the positioner mode and pulse-train mode

High-performance program controller capable of controlling up to six axes at the same time

N E W N E W

Shaft type

Shaft type

Shaft type

Small type

Flat type

Medium type

Large type

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

Linear scale

Coil unit

Guide

Base

Magnet shaft

Despite its compact body, the large type (W21 type) generates a high rated thrust of 400 N through its unique structure that adopts a high-density coil with core and flat magnet. This high thrust enables the actuator to accommodate a payload of up to 120 kg. The W21 can also be ordered with a long stroke of up to 4.15 m, which is ideal for transferring large LCD boards.

Capable of Transferring a Payload of Up to 120 kg over a Length of Up to 4.15 m

Our linear servo actuators are classified into the small, lightweight shaft type, small type with a slim body, flat type with low height, intermediate type offering excellent moment rigidity, and large type capable of transferring a maximum load of 120 kg, among others. We provide a wide selection for you to choose from according to your specific application.

A Wide-ranging Lineup Supporting Small to Large Systems

We have a line of multi-slider models that allow multiple sliders to be operated on a single actuator. These configurations are very effective in saving space and reducing the cycle time. Also, you can use the synchronization function - a popular function offered by the XSEL controller series - to configure a system for transferring glass boards whose size is increasing, or transferring a load at high speed over a wide range.

Multi-slider Type and Synchronization Function

The high performance backed by the maximum acceleration of 3 G and maximum speed of 2.5 m/sec reduces the cycle time significantly compared to when single-axis robots of ball-screw type are used. Unlike with ball-screw actuators, linear servo actuators will not suffer from a drop in their maximum speed as a result of reaching a dangerous speed, even when operated over a long stroke. This means that loads can be transferred reliably at high speed.

Significant Reduction in Cycle Time with a High Acceleration of Up to 3 G and High Speed of 2.5 m/sec

Features

The shaft has a built-in magnet surrounded by a coil to utilize magnetic flux in all directions. As a result, even the compact actuator can generate high thrust. Since the structure requires fewer magnets, the shaft type also offers a great cost advantage.

Compact, Low-cost Shaft Type

The large, high-thrust type adopts a roller-guide structure to support high loads of up to 120 kg. Since the roller guide is less subject to elastic deformation due to load compared to the ball guide, the operation is quiet and smooth while high moment rigidity is also ensured.

Large, High-thrust Type for High-load Applications

Performance/Functions

With linear servo motors, the magnet is not contacting the coil, which means these motors do not need maintenance. Also, all shaft models come with AQ seals installed on their guide. AQ seals supply lubricating oil to the guide over a long period, so the guide need not be oiled for years.

A majority of parts and components comprising IAI’s linear servo actuators, such as the base, guide, linear motor and linear scale, have been developed internally by IAI. Use of in-house parts and components means that the costs of these actuators are kept to a minimum.

AQ Seals Achieving Maintenance-free Operation for a Long Time

■ Traveling Test Data (with/without AQ Seals)

■ Section View of Shaft Type

■ Comparison of Traveling Time between Linear Servo Actuator and Single-axis Robot

Section View of Large Type

Multi-slider type Synchronized operation

Low Cost

Maintainability/Low Cost

Controller

Variations/Structures

A high-function, multi-axis controller capable of controlling up to six axes simultaneously. You can also control a combination of linear servo actuators and single-axis robots using the X-SEL.

Program Control of Up to 6 Axes A dedicated single-axis controller offering both the positioner function and pulse-train input function. Low price is also an attractive feature of the SCON controller.

Positioner/Pulse-train Control

A program controller capable of controlling up to two axes using a simple program (SEL language). The SSEL controller can be used standalone without any external device (PLC). You can also switch to the positioner mode to use the SSEL as a positioner controller.

Program/Positioner Control

3 4

2500

2000

1500

1000

500

0.64

Rated speed: 1000mm/s

Rated speed: 2,500 mm/sec

Acceleration: 3 G

Acceleration: 1 G

Time (sec)

Spe

ed (m

m/s

ec)

1.25

Single-axis robot

Comparison conditionsTravel: 1 mMove at the maximum speed. 0.15 sec of settling time is included.

Linear servo actuator

Coil unit

Linear scale

Cable track

Guide

Magnet

No lubrication

Just like single-axis robots and motorized cylinders, operation of IAI’s linear servo actuators is very easy. All you need is to connect the actuator to a controller using a dedicated cable and supply the power. The actuator is now ready to go without cumbersome settings or adjustments. You can also select a desired controller from three different types according to your specific application.

Easy Control

A new function has been added to prevent two sliders from colliding with each other when operated independently in the multi-slider operation mode.

Multi-slider Collision Prevention Function

With AQ sealsNo problem for 25,000 km

Test stopped after 1,800 km due to significant wear

Distance traveled (km)

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

Linear scale

Coil unit

Guide

Base

Magnet shaft

Despite its compact body, the large type (W21 type) generates a high rated thrust of 400 N through its unique structure that adopts a high-density coil with core and flat magnet. This high thrust enables the actuator to accommodate a payload of up to 120 kg. The W21 can also be ordered with a long stroke of up to 4.15 m, which is ideal for transferring large LCD boards.

Capable of Transferring a Payload of Up to 120 kg over a Length of Up to 4.15 m

Our linear servo actuators are classified into the small, lightweight shaft type, small type with a slim body, flat type with low height, intermediate type offering excellent moment rigidity, and large type capable of transferring a maximum load of 120 kg, among others. We provide a wide selection for you to choose from according to your specific application.

A Wide-ranging Lineup Supporting Small to Large Systems

We have a line of multi-slider models that allow multiple sliders to be operated on a single actuator. These configurations are very effective in saving space and reducing the cycle time. Also, you can use the synchronization function - a popular function offered by the XSEL controller series - to configure a system for transferring glass boards whose size is increasing, or transferring a load at high speed over a wide range.

Multi-slider Type and Synchronization Function

The high performance backed by the maximum acceleration of 3 G and maximum speed of 2.5 m/sec reduces the cycle time significantly compared to when single-axis robots of ball-screw type are used. Unlike with ball-screw actuators, linear servo actuators will not suffer from a drop in their maximum speed as a result of reaching a dangerous speed, even when operated over a long stroke. This means that loads can be transferred reliably at high speed.

Significant Reduction in Cycle Time with a High Acceleration of Up to 3 G and High Speed of 2.5 m/sec

Features

The shaft has a built-in magnet surrounded by a coil to utilize magnetic flux in all directions. As a result, even the compact actuator can generate high thrust. Since the structure requires fewer magnets, the shaft type also offers a great cost advantage.

Compact, Low-cost Shaft Type

The large, high-thrust type adopts a roller-guide structure to support high loads of up to 120 kg. Since the roller guide is less subject to elastic deformation due to load compared to the ball guide, the operation is quiet and smooth while high moment rigidity is also ensured.

Large, High-thrust Type for High-load Applications

Performance/Functions

With linear servo motors, the magnet is not contacting the coil, which means these motors do not need maintenance. Also, all shaft models come with AQ seals installed on their guide. AQ seals supply lubricating oil to the guide over a long period, so the guide need not be oiled for years.

A majority of parts and components comprising IAI’s linear servo actuators, such as the base, guide, linear motor and linear scale, have been developed internally by IAI. Use of in-house parts and components means that the costs of these actuators are kept to a minimum.

AQ Seals Achieving Maintenance-free Operation for a Long Time

■ Traveling Test Data (with/without AQ Seals)

■ Section View of Shaft Type

■ Comparison of Traveling Time between Linear Servo Actuator and Single-axis Robot

Section View of Large Type

Multi-slider type Synchronized operation

Low Cost

Maintainability/Low Cost

Controller

Variations/Structures

A high-function, multi-axis controller capable of controlling up to six axes simultaneously. You can also control a combination of linear servo actuators and single-axis robots using the X-SEL.

Program Control of Up to 6 Axes A dedicated single-axis controller offering both the positioner function and pulse-train input function. Low price is also an attractive feature of the SCON controller.

Positioner/Pulse-train Control

A program controller capable of controlling up to two axes using a simple program (SEL language). The SSEL controller can be used standalone without any external device (PLC). You can also switch to the positioner mode to use the SSEL as a positioner controller.

Program/Positioner Control

3 4

2500

2000

1500

1000

500

0.64

Rated speed: 1000mm/s

Rated speed: 2,500 mm/sec

Acceleration: 3 G

Acceleration: 1 G

Time (sec)

Spe

ed (m

m/s

ec)

1.25

Single-axis robot

Comparison conditionsTravel: 1 mMove at the maximum speed. 0.15 sec of settling time is included.

Linear servo actuator

Coil unit

Linear scale

Cable track

Guide

Magnet

No lubrication

Just like single-axis robots and motorized cylinders, operation of IAI’s linear servo actuators is very easy. All you need is to connect the actuator to a controller using a dedicated cable and supply the power. The actuator is now ready to go without cumbersome settings or adjustments. You can also select a desired controller from three different types according to your specific application.

Easy Control

A new function has been added to prevent two sliders from colliding with each other when operated independently in the multi-slider operation mode.

Multi-slider Collision Prevention Function

With AQ sealsNo problem for 25,000 km

Test stopped after 1,800 km due to significant wear

Distance traveled (km)

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

■ List of Actuator Specifications ■ List of Controller Specifications

5 6

Exterior view Slider Stroke(mm)

Thrust(N)

Maximumspeed

(mm/sec)

Model(type)

Pages Maximumpayload

(kg)

Actuatorwidth(mm)

60 15

S6SS P15~16

P17~18

P19~20

P21~22

P23~24

P25~26

P27~28

P29~30

P31~32

P33~34

P35~36

P37~38

P39~40

P41~42

P43

P44

P45

P46

P47

P48

P49

P50

S6SM

S8SS

S8SM

S8HS

S8HM

S10SS

S10SM

S10HS

S10HM

H8SS

H8SM

H8HS

H8HM

L15SS

L15SM

N19SS

N19SM

W21SS

W21SM

W21HS

W21HM

3

5

7

15

20

5

2500

8

5

30

60

120

25

35

65

80

30

60

30

100

200

400

Shaft Type

Small Type

Flat Type

Medium Type

Large Type (Standard)

Large Type (High thrust)

Single-axis robot

Single-slider 48~1248

40~1048

60~1620

60~1440

60~1620

60~1380

90~2070

60~1860

90~2070

105~1815

50~1650

130~1430

50~1550

130~1230

150~1650

144~2592

1050~4155

730~3835

895~4000

420~3525

50~1450

72~2232

80

100

80

145

193

210

Exterior viewNumber of controlled

axes

Model(series – type) Pages

Number of positions

Inputpowersupply

Number of programs

1 axis2 axes

512

128 programs9999 steps

1 axis −

Single-phase

AC100VAC200V

1 axis2 axes3 axes4 axes5 axes6 axes

Feature

Affordable 1-axispositioner capableof both positioner

control andpulse-train control

Also supporting fieldnetwork connection

Affordable 2-axiscontroller thatcan performinterpolation operation via

program control

High-function,multi-axis controllercapable of operating

up to six axessimultaneously

Also supporting fieldnetwork connection

20,000 Three-phase

AC200V

Single-phase

AC200V128 programs9999 steps

SCON-C

XSEL-PXSEL-Q

P51

20,000 SSEL-C P52

P53

■ Correspondence Table of Actuator/Controller Operation

SCON−C SSEL−C

○ ○

○ ○

○ ○

○ ○

○ ○

× ×

○ ○

XSEL−P/Q

Controllers

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e F

lat type

Med

ium typ

e Larg

e type

Stand

ardS

tandard

Stand

ardS

tandard

Stand

ardS

tandard

Stand

ardH

igh thrust

Hig

h thrustH

igh thrust

Hig

h thrust

Single-slider

Single-slider

Single-slider

Single-slider

Single-slider

Single-slider

Single-slider

Single-slider

Single-slider

Multi-slider

Multi-slider

Single-slider

Multi-slider

Multi-slider

Multi-slider

Multi-slider

Multi-slider

Multi-slider

Multi-slider

Multi-slider

Multi-slider

Actuato

rs

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

■ List of Actuator Specifications ■ List of Controller Specifications

5 6

Exterior view Slider Stroke(mm)

Thrust(N)

Maximumspeed

(mm/sec)

Model(type)

Pages Maximumpayload

(kg)

Actuatorwidth(mm)

60 15

S6SS P15~16

P17~18

P19~20

P21~22

P23~24

P25~26

P27~28

P29~30

P31~32

P33~34

P35~36

P37~38

P39~40

P41~42

P43

P44

P45

P46

P47

P48

P49

P50

S6SM

S8SS

S8SM

S8HS

S8HM

S10SS

S10SM

S10HS

S10HM

H8SS

H8SM

H8HS

H8HM

L15SS

L15SM

N19SS

N19SM

W21SS

W21SM

W21HS

W21HM

3

5

7

15

20

5

2500

8

5

30

60

120

25

35

65

80

30

60

30

100

200

400

Shaft Type

Small Type

Flat Type

Medium Type

Large Type (Standard)

Large Type (High thrust)

Single-axis robot

Single-slider 48~1248

40~1048

60~1620

60~1440

60~1620

60~1380

90~2070

60~1860

90~2070

105~1815

50~1650

130~1430

50~1550

130~1230

150~1650

144~2592

1050~4155

730~3835

895~4000

420~3525

50~1450

72~2232

80

100

80

145

193

210

Exterior viewNumber of controlled

axes

Model(series – type) Pages

Number of positions

Inputpowersupply

Number of programs

1 axis2 axes

512

128 programs9999 steps

1 axis −

Single-phase

AC100VAC200V

1 axis2 axes3 axes4 axes5 axes6 axes

Feature

Affordable 1-axispositioner capableof both positioner

control andpulse-train control

Also supporting fieldnetwork connection

Affordable 2-axiscontroller thatcan performinterpolation operation via

program control

High-function,multi-axis controllercapable of operating

up to six axessimultaneously

Also supporting fieldnetwork connection

20,000 Three-phase

AC200V

Single-phase

AC200V128 programs9999 steps

SCON-C

XSEL-PXSEL-Q

P51

20,000 SSEL-C P52

P53

■ Correspondence Table of Actuator/Controller Operation

SCON−C SSEL−C

○ ○

○ ○

○ ○

○ ○

○ ○

× ×

○ ○

XSEL−P/Q

Controllers

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e F

lat type

Med

ium typ

e Larg

e type

Stand

ardS

tandard

Stand

ardS

tandard

Stand

ardS

tandard

Stand

ardH

igh thrust

Hig

h thrustH

igh thrust

Hig

h thrust

Single-slider

Single-slider

Single-slider

Single-slider

Single-slider

Single-slider

Single-slider

Single-slider

Single-slider

Multi-slider

Multi-slider

Single-slider

Multi-slider

Multi-slider

Multi-slider

Multi-slider

Multi-slider

Multi-slider

Multi-slider

Multi-slider

Multi-slider

Actuato

rs

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

■ System Configuration ■ System Configuration

7 8

SSEL Controller

XSEL Controller

PLC

Teaching pendant (Refer to P. 63.)Model: IA-T-X/XD/XA(Optional)

Main power supply Single-phase AC200V/Three-phase AC200V

I/O flat cable (Refer to P. 66.) Model: CB-DS-PIO020(Supplied with the controller)

Panel unit(Refer to P. 64.) Model: PU-1(Optional)

Regenerative resistanceunit cable Model: CB-SC-REU010

Motor cable (Refer to P. 65.) Model: CB-X-MA□□□(For Shaft, Small, Flat and Medium Types)CB-XMC-MA□□□(For Large type)

Absolute-data backup battery (Refer to P. 64.) Model: AB-5

PC software (Refer to P. 63.) Model: IA-101-X-MW(with RS232C cable) IA-101-X-USB (with USB cable) (Optional)

System-memory backup battery (Refer to P. 64.) Model: AB-5-CS (with case)

AB-5 (battery only) (Optional) *1

USB cable(Refer to P. 64.)Model: CB-SEL-USB010(Supplied with PC software IA-101-X-USB)

RS232C cableModel: CB-ST-E1MW050-EB(Supplied with PC softwareIA-101-X-MW)

Conversion cable(Refer to P. 64) Model: CB-SEL-SJ002(Optional)

2m

PLC

I/O flat cable (Refer to P. 66.) Model: CB-X-PIO020(Supplied with the controller)

2m

4m

5m

1m

5m

0.2m

1m

1m

3m

1m

4m

5m

• DeviceNet• CC-Link• ProfiBus• Ethernet

*1 The system-memory backup battery is required if you want to retain flags and other data used in the program even after the power is turned off.

SCON Controller

PLCTeaching pendant (Refer to P. 62.)<Model: RCM-T/TD><Model: RCM-E><Model: RCM-P>

Field network

I/O flat cable (Refer to P. 66.) <Model: CB-PAC-PIO□□□>Cable length: 2 m (standard) (Supplied with the controller)

To connect an SCON controller to a field network, you can either select anetwork-ready model or use a gatewayunit. Network-ready SCON models canbe connected directly to a network.However, their functions will be limitedto the remote I/O level (= control willbe solely based on ON/OFF of I/Os).If a gateway unit is used, you can havenumerical data such as coordinatevalues communicated between thecontroller and actuator.

* Take note that network-ready SCON controllers do not support pulse-train control.

Regenerative resistance unit (Refer to P. 64.) Model: REU-2(Optional)

(Manufacturer: Densei-Lambda)(You can also purchase the above noise filter through IAI. Please contact IAI for details.)

Motor cable (Refer to P. 65.) Model: CB-X-MA□□□(For Shaft, Small, Flat and Medium Types)Model: CB-XMC-MA□□□(For Large type)

Plug + shell forpulse-train input (Supplied with thecontroller)

Communication cable for pulse-train input (Refer to P. 66.) <Model: CB-SC-PIOS□□□>(Optional)

① External device communication cable Model: CB-RCA-SIO050

② RS232 conversion adapterModel: RCB-CV-MW

③ USB conversion adapterModel: RCB-CV-USB

④ USB cable Model: CB-SEL-USB010

① RS232C cable Model: CB-ST-E1MW050-EB② USB conversion unit (Refer to P. 64.) Model: IA-CV-USB③ USB cable (Refer to P. 64.) Model: CB-SEL-USB010

PC software (Refer to P. 63.) Model: IA-101-X-MW (Comes with ①) IA-101-X-USBMW (Comes with ①, ② and ③)(Optional)

Encoder cable (Refer to P. 65.) Model: CB-X2-PA□□□(For Shaft, Small, Flat and Medium Types)Model: CB-X2-PLA□□□(For Large type)

Absolute-data backup battery (Refer to P. 64.) Model: AB-5

PC software (Refer to P. 62.)RS232 connection type (Comes with ① and ②) <Model: RCM-101-MW>

PC software (Refer to P. 62.)USB connection type(Comes with ①, ③ and ④)<Model: RCM-101-USB>

5m

5m

Main power supply Single-phase AC100VSingle-phase AC200V

Recommended model MC1210Be sure to use a noise filter whenconnecting to a power supply.

ESC

987

654

0

321

BIGIN END

IAI

5m

1m

Be sure to use a noise filter whenconnecting to a power supply.

*

(Manufacturer: Densei-Lambda)(You can also purchase the above noise filter through IAI. Please contact IAI for details.)

Main power supply Single-phase AC100VSingle-phase AC200VRecommended model MC1220 (100V)MC1210 (200V)

Encoder cable (Refer to P. 65.) Model: CB-X2-PA□□□(For Shaft, Small, Flat and Medium Types)Model: CB-X2-PLA□□□(For Large type)

Teaching pendant (Refer to P. 63.)Model: IA-T-X/XD/XA(Optional)

Regenerativeresistance unit (Refer to P. 64.) Model: REU-2(Optional)

Regenerativeresistance unit (Refer to P. 64.) Model: REU-1(Optional)

Regenerative resistance unit cable Model: CB-SC-REU010

Absolute-data backup battery (Refer to P. 64.) Model: AB-5

Motor cable (Refer to P. 65.) Model: CB-X-MA□□□(For Shaft, Small, Flat and Medium Types)CB-XMC-MA□□□(For Large type)

Encoder cable (Refer to P. 65.) Model: CB-X2-PA□□□(For Shaft, Small, Flat and Medium Types)Model: CB-X2-PLA□□□(For Large type)

If command pulse trainsof open collector methodare used, be sure to usea pulse converter.

*

*

*

The cable is supplied with the PCsoftware. Refer to P. 64 for details on replacement cables.

*

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

■ System Configuration ■ System Configuration

7 8

SSEL Controller

XSEL Controller

PLC

Teaching pendant (Refer to P. 63.)Model: IA-T-X/XD/XA(Optional)

Main power supply Single-phase AC200V/Three-phase AC200V

I/O flat cable (Refer to P. 66.) Model: CB-DS-PIO020(Supplied with the controller)

Panel unit(Refer to P. 64.) Model: PU-1(Optional)

Regenerative resistanceunit cable Model: CB-SC-REU010

Motor cable (Refer to P. 65.) Model: CB-X-MA□□□(For Shaft, Small, Flat and Medium Types)CB-XMC-MA□□□(For Large type)

Absolute-data backup battery (Refer to P. 64.) Model: AB-5

PC software (Refer to P. 63.) Model: IA-101-X-MW(with RS232C cable) IA-101-X-USB (with USB cable) (Optional)

System-memory backup battery (Refer to P. 64.) Model: AB-5-CS (with case)

AB-5 (battery only) (Optional) *1

USB cable(Refer to P. 64.)Model: CB-SEL-USB010(Supplied with PC software IA-101-X-USB)

RS232C cableModel: CB-ST-E1MW050-EB(Supplied with PC softwareIA-101-X-MW)

Conversion cable(Refer to P. 64) Model: CB-SEL-SJ002(Optional)

2m

PLC

I/O flat cable (Refer to P. 66.) Model: CB-X-PIO020(Supplied with the controller)

2m

4m

5m

1m

5m

0.2m

1m

1m

3m

1m

4m

5m

• DeviceNet• CC-Link• ProfiBus• Ethernet

*1 The system-memory backup battery is required if you want to retain flags and other data used in the program even after the power is turned off.

SCON Controller

PLCTeaching pendant (Refer to P. 62.)<Model: RCM-T/TD><Model: RCM-E><Model: RCM-P>

Field network

I/O flat cable (Refer to P. 66.) <Model: CB-PAC-PIO□□□>Cable length: 2 m (standard) (Supplied with the controller)

To connect an SCON controller to a field network, you can either select anetwork-ready model or use a gatewayunit. Network-ready SCON models canbe connected directly to a network.However, their functions will be limitedto the remote I/O level (= control willbe solely based on ON/OFF of I/Os).If a gateway unit is used, you can havenumerical data such as coordinatevalues communicated between thecontroller and actuator.

* Take note that network-ready SCON controllers do not support pulse-train control.

Regenerative resistance unit (Refer to P. 64.) Model: REU-2(Optional)

(Manufacturer: Densei-Lambda)(You can also purchase the above noise filter through IAI. Please contact IAI for details.)

Motor cable (Refer to P. 65.) Model: CB-X-MA□□□(For Shaft, Small, Flat and Medium Types)Model: CB-XMC-MA□□□(For Large type)

Plug + shell forpulse-train input (Supplied with thecontroller)

Communication cable for pulse-train input (Refer to P. 66.) <Model: CB-SC-PIOS□□□>(Optional)

① External device communication cable Model: CB-RCA-SIO050

② RS232 conversion adapterModel: RCB-CV-MW

③ USB conversion adapterModel: RCB-CV-USB

④ USB cable Model: CB-SEL-USB010

① RS232C cable Model: CB-ST-E1MW050-EB② USB conversion unit (Refer to P. 64.) Model: IA-CV-USB③ USB cable (Refer to P. 64.) Model: CB-SEL-USB010

PC software (Refer to P. 63.) Model: IA-101-X-MW (Comes with ①) IA-101-X-USBMW (Comes with ①, ② and ③)(Optional)

Encoder cable (Refer to P. 65.) Model: CB-X2-PA□□□(For Shaft, Small, Flat and Medium Types)Model: CB-X2-PLA□□□(For Large type)

Absolute-data backup battery (Refer to P. 64.) Model: AB-5

PC software (Refer to P. 62.)RS232 connection type (Comes with ① and ②) <Model: RCM-101-MW>

PC software (Refer to P. 62.)USB connection type(Comes with ①, ③ and ④)<Model: RCM-101-USB>

5m

5m

Main power supply Single-phase AC100VSingle-phase AC200VRecommended model MC1210Be sure to use a noise filter when

connecting to a power supply.

ESC

987

654

0

321

BIGIN END

IAI

5m

1m

Be sure to use a noise filter whenconnecting to a power supply.

*

(Manufacturer: Densei-Lambda)(You can also purchase the above noise filter through IAI. Please contact IAI for details.)

Main power supply Single-phase AC100VSingle-phase AC200V

Recommended model MC1220 (100V)

MC1210 (200V)

Encoder cable (Refer to P. 65.) Model: CB-X2-PA□□□(For Shaft, Small, Flat and Medium Types)Model: CB-X2-PLA□□□(For Large type)

Teaching pendant (Refer to P. 63.)Model: IA-T-X/XD/XA(Optional)

Regenerativeresistance unit (Refer to P. 64.) Model: REU-2(Optional)

Regenerativeresistance unit (Refer to P. 64.) Model: REU-1(Optional)

Regenerative resistance unit cable Model: CB-SC-REU010

Absolute-data backup battery (Refer to P. 64.) Model: AB-5

Motor cable (Refer to P. 65.) Model: CB-X-MA□□□(For Shaft, Small, Flat and Medium Types)CB-XMC-MA□□□(For Large type)

Encoder cable (Refer to P. 65.) Model: CB-X2-PA□□□(For Shaft, Small, Flat and Medium Types)Model: CB-X2-PLA□□□(For Large type)

If command pulse trainsof open collector methodare used, be sure to usea pulse converter.

*

*

*

The cable is supplied with the PCsoftware. Refer to P. 64 for details on replacement cables.

*

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

Selection method

V

ta tf

t

td tc T

F

FaFf

Fd

ta tf

t

td

T

9 10

■ Model Selection

When selecting an appropriate linear servo actuator, remember that your actuator must meet the following two conditions.

• The thrust required for acceleration is equal to or less than the maximum thrustof the linear servo actuator.

• The thrust during continuous operation is equal to or less than the rated thrustof the linear servo actuator.

The above conditions are explained using the trapezoidoperation pattern as an example.

The operation pattern shown to the left can be converted to the graph below where the vertical axis represents thrust:

In the above graph:

t : Operation time per cycle (sec) tf : Time traveled at constant speed (sec) ta: Acceleration time (sec) td: Deceleration time (sec) tc: Settling time (sec)

In the above graph:

Fa: Thrust required for acceleration (N) Fd: Thrust required for deceleration (N) Ff: Traveling resistance (N)

Thrust required for acceleration (Fa) ≦ Maximum thrustof linear servo actuator

If the thrust required for acceleration (Fa) exceeds the maximum thrust of the linear servo actuator, the slider load or acceleration must be reduced. Check the maximum payload and maximum acceleration using the following formulas, respectively:

Maximum payload m = (Fa - Ff) / a - MMaximum acceleration a = (Fa - Ff) / (M + m)

For the slider to accelerate according to the command, the thrust required for acceleration, or Fa, must be smaller than the maximum thrust of the linear servo actuator. Calculate the thrust required for acceleration (Fa) using the formula below:

S6SS

S8SS

S8HS

S10SS

S10HS

H8SS

H8HS

L15SS

N19SS

W21SS

W21HS

1.4

1.7

2.0

3.5

4.0

1.5

2.0

1.5

5.5

10.0

20.0

5V + 5

9V + 7

9V + 7

20V + 13.5

20V + 13.5

2V + 10

2V + 10

2V + 10

16V + 12

20V + 70

20V + 70

60

100

140

260

320

90

180

90

Refer to the graph on the right.

600

1200

Weight of slider (kg) Maximum thrust (N)Traveling resistanceFf (N)

* V: Slider traveling speed (m/sec) (The attained speed is used under the triangle operating condition.)

350

300

250

200

150

100

50

0

263

225

188

0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500

Slider traveling speed (mm/sec)

Fa = (M+m) • a+FfM : Weight of slider (kg) m : Slider load (kg)

a : Command acceleration (m/sec²) Ff : Traveling resistance (N)

Maximum thrust of N19SS

■ Examples of Use

Loader/Unloader By using a multi-slider type, you can perform with one actuator what normally requires two actuators. This saves both space and cost.

Transfer of Parts between ProcessesBoasting the maximum acceleration of 3 G and maximum speed of 2.5 m/sec, linear servo actuators can certainly reduce your cycle time.

Glass Board Transfer System By synchronizing two large actuators each capableof transferring a load of up to 120 kg, you can alsotransfer large glass boards.

Glass Board Inspection System A combination of a large linear servo actuator with the maximum stroke of 4,155 mm, with a small linear servo actuator, allows for high-speedinspection over a wide range.

Condition Maximum Thrust

Motor generated

output (N

)

If the obtained value of Fa is smaller than the maximum thrust of the linear servo actuator, condition ① is satisfied.

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

Selection method

V

ta tf

t

td tc T

F

FaFf

Fd

ta tf

t

td

T

9 10

■ Model Selection

When selecting an appropriate linear servo actuator, remember that your actuator must meet the following two conditions.

• The thrust required for acceleration is equal to or less than the maximum thrustof the linear servo actuator.

• The thrust during continuous operation is equal to or less than the rated thrustof the linear servo actuator.

The above conditions are explained using the trapezoidoperation pattern as an example.

The operation pattern shown to the left can be converted to the graph below where the vertical axis represents thrust:

In the above graph:

t : Operation time per cycle (sec) tf : Time traveled at constant speed (sec) ta: Acceleration time (sec) td: Deceleration time (sec) tc: Settling time (sec)

In the above graph:

Fa: Thrust required for acceleration (N) Fd: Thrust required for deceleration (N) Ff: Traveling resistance (N)

Thrust required for acceleration (Fa) ≦ Maximum thrustof linear servo actuator

If the thrust required for acceleration (Fa) exceeds the maximum thrust of the linear servo actuator, the slider load or acceleration must be reduced. Check the maximum payload and maximum acceleration using the following formulas, respectively:

Maximum payload m = (Fa - Ff) / a - MMaximum acceleration a = (Fa - Ff) / (M + m)

For the slider to accelerate according to the command, the thrust required for acceleration, or Fa, must be smaller than the maximum thrust of the linear servo actuator. Calculate the thrust required for acceleration (Fa) using the formula below:

S6SS

S8SS

S8HS

S10SS

S10HS

H8SS

H8HS

L15SS

N19SS

W21SS

W21HS

1.4

1.7

2.0

3.5

4.0

1.5

2.0

1.5

5.5

10.0

20.0

5V + 5

9V + 7

9V + 7

20V + 13.5

20V + 13.5

2V + 10

2V + 10

2V + 10

16V + 12

20V + 70

20V + 70

60

100

140

260

320

90

180

90

Refer to the graph on the right.

600

1200

Weight of slider (kg) Maximum thrust (N)Traveling resistanceFf (N)

* V: Slider traveling speed (m/sec) (The attained speed is used under the triangle operating condition.)

350

300

250

200

150

100

50

0

263

225

188

0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500

Slider traveling speed (mm/sec)

Fa = (M+m) • a+FfM : Weight of slider (kg) m : Slider load (kg)

a : Command acceleration (m/sec²) Ff : Traveling resistance (N)

Maximum thrust of N19SS

■ Examples of Use

Loader/Unloader By using a multi-slider type, you can perform with one actuator what normally requires two actuators. This saves both space and cost.

Transfer of Parts between ProcessesBoasting the maximum acceleration of 3 G and maximum speed of 2.5 m/sec, linear servo actuators can certainly reduce your cycle time.

Glass Board Transfer System By synchronizing two large actuators each capableof transferring a load of up to 120 kg, you can alsotransfer large glass boards.

Glass Board Inspection System A combination of a large linear servo actuator with the maximum stroke of 4,155 mm, with a small linear servo actuator, allows for high-speedinspection over a wide range.

Condition Maximum Thrust

Motor generated

output (N

)

If the obtained value of Fa is smaller than the maximum thrust of the linear servo actuator, condition ① is satisfied.

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

Exercise

Speed

Timesec

mm/s

Accelerationzone

Constant speedzone

Decelerationzone

Positioning settling time

Positioning time

Speedmm/s

Ft = t

Fa • ta + Ff • tf + Fd • td

Thrust during continuous operation (Ft) ≤ Rated thrust oflinear servo actuator

After considering the load and duty, the thrust during continuous operation, or Ft, must be smaller than the rated thrust of the linear servo actuator. Calculate the thrust during continuous operation using the formula below:

■ tf represents the time traveled at constant speed.Calculate tf by calculating the distance traveled atconstant speed, as follows:tf = Lc/VLc : Time traveled at constant speed (m)

V : Command speed (m/sec)

■ Fd represents the thrust required for deceleration.Calculate Fd using the formula below:

■ td represents the deceleration time. If the acceleration is the sameas the deceleration, td should be the same as the acceleration time.

■ t represents the operation time per cycle and is calculatedas a total sum of the acceleration time (ta), constant speedtime (tf), deceleration time (td), settling time (refer to thetable below), and stationary time.

Fd = (M + m) • a – Ff

15

25

35

65

80

Fa • ta + Ff • tf + Fd • td

S6SS

S8SS

S8HS

S10SS

S10HS

Rated thrust (N) Rated thrust (N)

H8SS

H8HS

L15SS

N19SS

W21SS

W21HS

30

60

30

100

200

400

t =Ft

Whether a given operation pattern is trapezoid or triangle can be determined by whether the speed attained by the actuator when operated over the specified travel at the specified speed is greater or smaller than the specified speed.

Attained speed (Vmax) = Travel (m) x Specified acceleration (m/sec²)

* Distance traveled at constant speed =Travel – Acceleration distance – Deceleration distanceAcceleration distance (deceleration distance) = V²/2a

td = V/a V : Speed (m/sec) a : Acceleration (m/sec²)

S6SS, S6SM, H8SS, H8SM, H8HS, H8HM, W21SS, W21SM, W21HS, W21HM

S8SS, S8SM, S8HS, S8HM, S10SS, S10SM, S10HS, S10HM, N19SS, N19SM

Settling time Models

0.15s

0.2s

Condition Thrust during Continuous Operation

Fa: Thrust required for acceleration (N)ta: Acceleration time (sec) Ff: Traveling resistance (N)tf: Rated traveling time (sec)

Fd: Thrust required for deceleration (N) td: Deceleration time (s) t: Operation time per cycle (sec) (t = ta + tf + td + settling time + stationary time)

ta represents the acceleration time. Here, how to calculate ta varies depending on whether the actuator is operated in the trapezoid pattern or triangle pattern.

Specified speed < Attained speed � Trapezoid patternSpecified speed > Attained speed Triangle pattern

Trapezoid pattern

Specified speed (m/sec) Command acceleration (m/sec²)

Specified speed (m/sec) Command acceleration (m/sec²)

Triangle pattern

Trapezoid pattern

Triangle pattern

Positioning settling time

TimesecAcceleration

zoneDeceleration

zone

Positioning time

If the thrust during continuous operation (Ft) obtained as above is smaller than the rated thrust, condition is satisfied.

If you want to use the maximum acceleration obtained in the test of condition to calculate the cycle time that allows for continuous operation, check if the calculated result is viable using the formula below:

The actuator can be operated under conditions where both conditions and above are satisfied.

If either condition is not satisfied, reduce the slider load, acceleration or duty (*) or take other appropriate measures.

* To reduce the duty, the ratio of traveling time (acceleration +constant speed + deceleration) to cycle time must be lowered.

11 12

Let’s select a linear servo actuator using the selection method explained in the preceding section.

● Actuator model

● Speed

● Acceleration

● Travel distance

● Slider load

● Settling time

● Stroke 1.5 m The actuator will move back and forth under the above conditions.

LSA-H8SS

2.5m/sec

19.6m/sec

1.5m

3kg

0.15sec

★ Operating conditions

The above operation pattern is illustrated by the graph shown to the right.

Now, let’s start calculation according to the selection method.

Fa = (M + m) • a + Ff

Ft = t

Fa • ta + Ff • tf + Fd • td

Now, when the operation pattern at ta is checked, the following is revealed:

Attained speed (Vmax) = 1.5×16.6 → 4.9 m/sec Since this value is greater than the specified speed of 2.5 m/sec, the operation pattern is determined to be trapezoid.

Accordingly, ta = 2.5÷1.6 → 0.15s

Next, tf is calculated.

Distance traveled at constant speed = 1.5 - {(2.5×2.5) ÷ (2×16.6)} × 2 → 1.12m

tf = 1.12 ÷ 2.5 → 0.45s

Thrust required for deceleration Fd = (1.5+3) × 16.6 - 15 → 59.7N

Since td = ta, t = ta + tf + td + 0.15 → 0.9 sec.

When the above values are applied, the earlier formula is rephrased as follows:

Ft = {(89.7 × 89.7) × 0.15 + (15 × 15) × 0.45 + (59.7 × 59.7) × 0.15} ÷ 0.9 → 45.25N

Since the result exceeds the rated thrust of the H8SS, or 30 N, this actuator cannot be used in this operation pattern.

Now, let’s calculate the cycle time that allows for continuous operation:

t = {(89.7 × 89.7) × 0.15 + (15 × 15) × 0.45 + (59.7 × 59.7) × 0.15} ÷ (30 × 30)→ 2.05s

As evident from the result, continuous operation can be performed if the cycle time is increased from 0.9 sec to 2.05 sec.

So, let’s recalculate by assuming t = 2.05.

Ft = {(89.7 × 89.7) × 0.15 + (15 × 15) × 0.45 + (59.7 × 59.7) × 0.15} ÷ 2.05 → 30N

Now, the actuator can be operated.

*1G = 9.8m/s

V

ta tf

t

td T

V

ta tf

t = 2.05

td T

Where, M : Weight of slider (kg): 1.5 kg for the H8SSm : Slider load (kg): 3 kg is used in this exercise.a : Command acceleration (m/sec²) : 19.6 m/sec² is used in this

exercise. Ff : Traveling resistance: 15 N is used in this exercise.

Based on the above conditions, the formula is rephrased as follows: Fa = 4.5×19.6 + 15 → 103.2NSince the maximum thrust of the H8SS is 90 N,this actuator cannot be used under these conditions.

Accordingly, either the slider load or acceleration must be changed. If the slider load is to be changed without changing the acceleration, the maximum load is calculated as follows:m = (90 - 15) ÷19.6 - 1.5 → 2.32 kg

If the acceleration is to be changed without changing the slider load (3 kg), the maximum acceleration is calculated as follows: a = (90 - 15) ÷ (1.5 + 3) → Approx. 16.6m/s²

In this exercise, the acceleration is changed to 16.6 m/sec².

Fa = 4.5 × 16.6 + 15 → 89.7N < 90N (maximum thrust)

Apply the above operation pattern to the formula for thrust during continuous operation explained earlier. For your reference, the command acceleration is assumed to be 16.6 m/sec² based on the examination result of maximum thrust:

Apply the above operation pattern to the formula for maximum thrust explained earlier:

(The deceleration is assumed to be the same.)

Condition Calculate the maximum thrust

Condition Calculate the thrust duringcontinuous operation

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

Exercise

Speed

Timesec

mm/s

Accelerationzone

Constant speedzone

Decelerationzone

Positioning settling time

Positioning time

Speedmm/s

Ft = t

Fa • ta + Ff • tf + Fd • td

Thrust during continuous operation (Ft) ≤ Rated thrust oflinear servo actuator

After considering the load and duty, the thrust during continuous operation, or Ft, must be smaller than the rated thrust of the linear servo actuator. Calculate the thrust during continuous operation using the formula below:

■ tf represents the time traveled at constant speed. Calculate tf by calculating the distance traveled at constant speed, as follows:

tf = Lc/V Lc : Time traveled at constant speed (m)

V : Command speed (m/sec)

■ Fd represents the thrust required for deceleration. Calculate Fd using the formula below:

■ td represents the deceleration time. If the acceleration is the same as the deceleration, td should be the same as the acceleration time.

■ t represents the operation time per cycle and is calculated as a total sum of the acceleration time (ta), constant speed time (tf), deceleration time (td), settling time (refer to the table below), and stationary time.

Fd = (M + m) • a – Ff

15

25

35

65

80

Fa • ta + Ff • tf + Fd • td

S6SS

S8SS

S8HS

S10SS

S10HS

Rated thrust (N) Rated thrust (N)

H8SS

H8HS

L15SS

N19SS

W21SS

W21HS

30

60

30

100

200

400

t =Ft

Whether a given operation pattern is trapezoid or triangle can be determined by whether the speed attained by the actuator when operated over the specified travel at the specified speed is greater or smaller than the specified speed.

Attained speed (Vmax) = Travel (m) x Specified acceleration (m/sec²)

* Distance traveled at constant speed = Travel – Acceleration distance – Deceleration distance Acceleration distance (deceleration distance) = V²/2a

td = V/a V : Speed (m/sec) a : Acceleration (m/sec²)

S6SS, S6SM, H8SS, H8SM, H8HS, H8HM, W21SS, W21SM, W21HS, W21HM

S8SS, S8SM, S8HS, S8HM, S10SS, S10SM, S10HS, S10HM, N19SS, N19SM

Settling time Models

0.15s

0.2s

Condition Thrust during Continuous Operation

Fa: Thrust required for acceleration (N)ta: Acceleration time (sec) Ff: Traveling resistance (N)tf: Rated traveling time (sec)

Fd: Thrust required for deceleration (N) td: Deceleration time (s) t: Operation time per cycle (sec) (t = ta + tf + td + settling time + stationary time)

ta represents the acceleration time. Here, how to calculate ta varies depending on whether the actuator is operated in the trapezoid pattern or triangle pattern.

Specified speed < Attained speed � Trapezoid patternSpecified speed > Attained speed Triangle pattern

Trapezoid pattern

Specified speed (m/sec) Command acceleration (m/sec²)

Specified speed (m/sec) Command acceleration (m/sec²)

Triangle pattern

Trapezoid pattern

Triangle pattern

Positioning settling time

TimesecAcceleration

zoneDeceleration

zone

Positioning time

If the thrust during continuous operation (Ft) obtained as above is smaller than the rated thrust, condition is satisfied.

If you want to use the maximum acceleration obtained in the test of condition to calculate the cycle time that allows for continuous operation, check if the calculated result is viable using the formula below:

The actuator can be operated under conditions where both conditions and above are satisfied.

If either condition is not satisfied, reduce the slider load, acceleration or duty (*) or take other appropriate measures.

* To reduce the duty, the ratio of traveling time (acceleration + constant speed + deceleration) to cycle time must be lowered.

11 12

Let’s select a linear servo actuator using the selection method explained in the preceding section.

● Actuator model

● Speed

● Acceleration

● Travel distance

● Slider load

● Settling time

● Stroke 1.5 m The actuator will move back and forth under the above conditions.

LSA-H8SS

2.5m/sec

19.6m/sec

1.5m

3kg

0.15sec

★ Operating conditions

The above operation pattern is illustrated by the graph shown to the right.

Now, let’s start calculation according to the selection method.

Fa = (M + m) • a + Ff

Ft = t

Fa • ta + Ff • tf + Fd • td

Now, when the operation pattern at ta is checked, the following is revealed:

Attained speed (Vmax) = 1.5×16.6 → 4.9 m/sec Since this value is greater than the specified speed of 2.5 m/sec, the operation pattern is determined to be trapezoid.

Accordingly, ta = 2.5÷1.6 → 0.15s

Next, tf is calculated.

Distance traveled at constant speed = 1.5 - {(2.5×2.5) ÷ (2×16.6)} × 2 → 1.12m

tf = 1.12 ÷ 2.5 → 0.45s

Thrust required for deceleration Fd = (1.5+3) × 16.6 - 15 → 59.7N

Since td = ta, t = ta + tf + td + 0.15 → 0.9 sec.

When the above values are applied, the earlier formula is rephrased as follows:

Ft = {(89.7 × 89.7) × 0.15 + (15 × 15) × 0.45 + (59.7 × 59.7) × 0.15} ÷ 0.9 → 45.25N

Since the result exceeds the rated thrust of the H8SS, or 30 N, this actuator cannot be used in this operation pattern.

Now, let’s calculate the cycle time that allows for continuous operation:

t = {(89.7 × 89.7) × 0.15 + (15 × 15) × 0.45 + (59.7 × 59.7) × 0.15} ÷ (30 × 30) → 2.05s

As evident from the result, continuous operation can be performed if the cycle time is increased from 0.9 sec to 2.05 sec.

So, let’s recalculate by assuming t = 2.05.

Ft = {(89.7 × 89.7) × 0.15 + (15 × 15) × 0.45 + (59.7 × 59.7) × 0.15} ÷ 2.05 → 30N

Now, the actuator can be operated.

*1G = 9.8m/s

V

ta tf

t

td T

V

ta tf

t = 2.05

td T

Where, M : Weight of slider (kg): 1.5 kg for the H8SSm : Slider load (kg): 3 kg is used in this exercise.a : Command acceleration (m/sec²) : 19.6 m/sec² is used in this exercise. Ff : Traveling resistance: 15 N is used in this exercise.

Based on the above conditions, the formula is rephrased as follows: Fa = 4.5×19.6 + 15 → 103.2NSince the maximum thrust of the H8SS is 90 N,this actuator cannot be used under these conditions.

Accordingly, either the slider load or acceleration must be changed. If the slider load is to be changed without changing the acceleration, the maximum load is calculated as follows:m = (90 - 15) ÷19.6 - 1.5 → 2.32 kg

If the acceleration is to be changed without changing the slider load (3 kg), the maximum acceleration is calculated as follows: a = (90 - 15) ÷ (1.5 + 3) → Approx. 16.6m/s²

In this exercise, the acceleration is changed to 16.6 m/sec².

Fa = 4.5 × 16.6 + 15 → 89.7N < 90N (maximum thrust)

Apply the above operation pattern to the formula for thrust during continuous operation explained earlier. For your reference, the command acceleration is assumed to be 16.6 m/sec² based on the examination result of maximum thrust:

Apply the above operation pattern to the formula for maximum thrust explained earlier:

(The deceleration is assumed to be the same.)

Condition Calculate the maximum thrust

Condition Calculate the thrust duringcontinuous operation

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

① Series

② Type

③ Encoder type

④ Applicable driver output

⑤ Stroke

⑥ Applicable controller

⑦ Cable length

⑧ Options

13 14

■ Cable Track Options

■ Stainless Sheet (Replacement Sheet)

Indicate the name of each series.

Indicate the type, actuator width, motor type and slider type.

Example) S 10 S M

Indicate the type of the encoder installed in the actuator.

I: Incremental type Since the slider position data is lost every time the power is turned

off, home return must be performed every time the power is turned on.

Indicate the driver wattage of the controller to be connected.

Indicate the stroke (range of operation) of the actuator (unit: mm).

Indicate the types of controllers with which the actuator can be operated.

T2: SCON/SSEL/XSEL - P/Q

Indicate the length of the motor/encoder cable connecting the actuator and controller.

N: No Cable

S: 3m

M: 5m

X□□ : Select this option if you want to specify a length other than 1, 3 and 5 m

(Example: X08 = 8 m) (*) The standard cables are robot cables.

Indicate the options to be installed on the actuator.

Refer to the facing page for details on CT2 to UM6.

* With the large type, the limit switch is a standard feature (required option). However, you

must still specify “L” in the model name.

Type S: Shaft Type H: Small Type L: Flat Type N: Medium Type W: Large Type

Actuator width 6:60mm 8:80mm 10:100mm 15:145mm 19:193mm 21:210mm

Motor type S: Standard type / H: High-thrust type

Slider type S: Single-slider type / M: Multi-slider type

* The maximum cablelength is 20 m for theSCON/SSEL and 30 mfor the XSEL.

No cable

3mm

5mm

Specified length

Robot cable

N

S

M

X□□R□□

S6SS

S6SM

S8SS

S8SM

S8HM

S8HS

S10SS

S10SM

S10HS

S10HM

H8SS

H8SM

H8HS

H8HM

L15SS

L15SM

N19SS

N19SM

W21SS

W21SM

W21HS

W21HM

Single-slider, 60 mm wide

Multi-slider, 60 mm wide

Single-slider, 80 mm wide

Multi-slider, 80 mm wide

High-thrust single slider, 80 mm wide

High-thrust multi-slider, 80 mm wide

Single-slider, 100 mm wide

Multi-slider, 100 mm wide

High-thrust single slider, 100 mm wide

High-thrust multi-slider, 100 mm wide

Single-slider, 80 mm wide

Multi-slider, 80 mm wide

High-thrust single slider, 80 mm wide

High-thrust multi-slider, 80 mm wide

Single-slider, 145 mm wide

Multi-slider, 145 mm wide

Single-slider, 193 mm wide

Multi-slider, 193 mm wide

Single-slider, 210 mm wide

Multi-slider, 210 mm wide

High-thrust single slider, 210 mm wide

High-thrust multi-slider, 210 mm wide

IncrementalI

4000~48

The strokevaries depending on the model.

48mm

~4000mm

Selected cable trackmodel

■Model

T2

ShaftType

SmallType

FlatType

MediumType

LargeType

CT2

CT3

CT4

CT5

CT6

US1

US2

US3

US4

US5

US6

UM1

UM2

UM3

UM4

UM5

UM6

Limit switch L (Standard)

100 100W

200W

300W

400W

1000W

200

300

400

1000

This stainless sheet is a dustproof sheet that prevents foreign objects from entering the actuator. If the sheet has broken or become damaged, order a replacement sheet by selecting an appropriate model from the right.

Stainless sheet

* Refer to the models specified under “Cable Track Options” on P. 14.

The cable track that comes standard with the shaft type and small type is designed exclusively for wiring a linear servo actuator and provides no space for additional cables the customer may require. If you must wire additional cables, specify a cable track for user wiring by selecting an appropriate model from the right. Cable tracks are available in two sizes of S and M, and you can select the installation direction from the six types illustrated below. * Although cable tracks for user wiring are not available for the flat type, medium type and large type, you can still specify a desired installation direction for the standard cable track (excluding the sideway specification.)

【Installation direction】

【Cable Track for User Wiring】

This is the standard installation direction that applies when a cable track direction is not specified. With a single-slider model, the cable track is installed in the direction shown below. With a multi-slider model, one cable track is installed on both ends.

The cable track is installed on the opposite side compared to the standard specification.

The home is reversed from the standard specification (cable track direction 1).

Cable track direction 1 (standard) Cable track direction 2 (opposite): CT2 Cable track direction 3 CT3

Type M

S6SS

S6SM

S8SS

S8SM

S8HS

S8HM

S10SS

S10SM

S10HS

S10HM

ST-S6SS- (stroke)

ST-S6SM- (stroke)

ST-S8SS- (stroke)

ST-S8SM- (stroke)

ST-S8HS- (stroke)

ST-S8HM- (stroke)

ST-S10SS- (stroke)

ST-S10SM- (stroke)

ST-S10HS- (stroke)

ST-S10HM- (stroke)

ST-H8SS- (stroke)

ST-H8SM- (stroke)

ST-H8HS- (stroke)

ST-H8HM- (stroke)

ST-W21SS- (stroke)

ST-W21SM- (stroke)

ST-W21HS- (stroke)

ST-W21HM- (stroke)

H8SS

H8SM

H8HS

H8HM

W21SS

W21SM

W21HS

W21HM

Type Type code Stainless sheet model Type Type code Stainless sheet model

ShaftType

SmallType

MediumType

LargeType

N19SS ST-N19SS- (stroke) N19SM ST-N19SM- (stroke)

The home is reversed from the CT2 specification (cable track direction 2).

This is the standard installation direction for actuators specified for sideway installation. With a single-slider model, the cable track is installed in the direction shown below. With a multi-slider model, one cable track is installed on both ends.

The cable track is installed on the opposite side compared to the sideway specification.

Cable track direction 5 (sideway, standard): CT5 Cable track direction 6 (opposite specification): CT6

LSA ICT2CT3CT4CT5CT6US1US2

US3US4US5US6UM1UM2UM3UM4UM5UM6

Cable trackfor user wiring

InstallationdirectionModel

None

Type S

Type M

1 (Standard)23456123456123456

【Model】

65

14

91

15

Type S

Horizontal specification Sideway specification

Cable track for user wiring

14

15

60

14

88

4091

Cable track for user wiring

14

40

85

Series Type Encoder type Applicable driver output Stroke Applicable controller Cable Options

Horizontal specification Sideway specification

Cable track direction 4 CT4

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

① Series

② Type

③ Encoder type

④ Applicable driver output

⑤ Stroke

⑥ Applicable controller

⑦ Cable length

⑧ Options

13 14

■Cable Track Options

■ Stainless Sheet (Replacement Sheet)

Indicate the name of each series.

Indicate the type, actuator width, motor type and slider type.

Example) S 10 S M

Indicate the type of the encoder installed in the actuator.

I: Incremental type Since the slider position data is lost every time the power is turned

off, home return must be performed every time the power is turned on.

Indicate the driver wattage of the controller to be connected.

Indicate the stroke (range of operation) of the actuator (unit: mm).

Indicate the types of controllers with which the actuator can be operated.

T2: SCON/SSEL/XSEL - P/Q

Indicate the length of the motor/encoder cable connecting the actuator and controller.

N: No Cable

S: 3m

M: 5m

X□□ : Select this option if you want to specify a length other than 1, 3 and 5 m

(Example: X08 = 8 m) (*) The standard cables are robot cables.

Indicate the options to be installed on the actuator.

Refer to the facing page for details on CT2 to UM6.

* With the large type, the limit switch is a standard feature (required option). However, you

must still specify “L” in the model name.

Type S: Shaft Type H: Small Type L: Flat Type N: Medium Type W: Large Type

Actuator width 6:60mm 8:80mm 10:100mm 15:145mm 19:193mm 21:210mm

Motor type S: Standard type / H: High-thrust type

Slider type S: Single-slider type / M: Multi-slider type

* The maximum cablelength is 20 m for theSCON/SSEL and 30 mfor the XSEL.

No cable

3mm

5mm

Specified length

Robot cable

N

S

M

X□□R□□

S6SS

S6SM

S8SS

S8SM

S8HM

S8HS

S10SS

S10SM

S10HS

S10HM

H8SS

H8SM

H8HS

H8HM

L15SS

L15SM

N19SS

N19SM

W21SS

W21SM

W21HS

W21HM

Single-slider, 60 mm wide

Multi-slider, 60 mm wide

Single-slider, 80 mm wide

Multi-slider, 80 mm wide

High-thrust single slider, 80 mm wide

High-thrust multi-slider, 80 mm wide

Single-slider, 100 mm wide

Multi-slider, 100 mm wide

High-thrust single slider, 100 mm wide

High-thrust multi-slider, 100 mm wide

Single-slider, 80 mm wide

Multi-slider, 80 mm wide

High-thrust single slider, 80 mm wide

High-thrust multi-slider, 80 mm wide

Single-slider, 145 mm wide

Multi-slider, 145 mm wide

Single-slider, 193 mm wide

Multi-slider, 193 mm wide

Single-slider, 210 mm wide

Multi-slider, 210 mm wide

High-thrust single slider, 210 mm wide

High-thrust multi-slider, 210 mm wide

IncrementalI

4000~48

The strokevaries depending on the model.

48mm

~4000mm

Selected cable trackmodel

■ Model

T2

ShaftType

SmallType

FlatType

MediumType

LargeType

CT2

CT3

CT4

CT5

CT6

US1

US2

US3

US4

US5

US6

UM1

UM2

UM3

UM4

UM5

UM6

Limit switch L (Standard)

100 100W

200W

300W

400W

1000W

200

300

400

1000

This stainless sheet is a dustproof sheet that prevents foreign objects from entering the actuator. If the sheet has broken or become damaged, order a replacement sheet by selecting an appropriate model from the right.

Stainless sheet

* Refer to the models specified under “Cable Track Options” on P. 14.

The cable track that comes standard with the shaft type and small type is designed exclusively for wiring a linear servo actuator and provides no space for additional cables the customer may require. If you must wire additional cables, specify a cable track for user wiring by selecting an appropriate model from the right. Cable tracks are available in two sizes of S and M, and you can select the installation direction from the six types illustrated below. * Although cable tracks for user wiring are not available for the flat type, medium type and large type, you can still specify a desired installation direction for the standard cable track (excluding the sideway specification.)

【Installation direction】

【Cable Track for User Wiring】

This is the standard installation direction that applies when a cable track direction is not specified. With a single-slider model, the cable track is installed in the direction shown below. With a multi-slider model, one cable track is installed on both ends.

The cable track is installed on the opposite side compared to the standard specification.

The home is reversed from the standard specification (cable track direction 1).

Cable track direction 1 (standard) Cable track direction 2 (opposite): CT2 Cable track direction 3 CT3

Type M

S6SS

S6SM

S8SS

S8SM

S8HS

S8HM

S10SS

S10SM

S10HS

S10HM

ST-S6SS- (stroke)

ST-S6SM- (stroke)

ST-S8SS- (stroke)

ST-S8SM- (stroke)

ST-S8HS- (stroke)

ST-S8HM- (stroke)

ST-S10SS- (stroke)

ST-S10SM- (stroke)

ST-S10HS- (stroke)

ST-S10HM- (stroke)

ST-H8SS- (stroke)

ST-H8SM- (stroke)

ST-H8HS- (stroke)

ST-H8HM- (stroke)

ST-W21SS- (stroke)

ST-W21SM- (stroke)

ST-W21HS- (stroke)

ST-W21HM- (stroke)

H8SS

H8SM

H8HS

H8HM

W21SS

W21SM

W21HS

W21HM

Type Type code Stainless sheet model Type Type code Stainless sheet model

ShaftType

SmallType

MediumType

LargeType

N19SS ST-N19SS- (stroke) N19SM ST-N19SM- (stroke)

The home is reversed from the CT2 specification (cable track direction 2).

This is the standard installation direction for actuators specified for sideway installation. With a single-slider model, the cable track is installed in the direction shown below. With a multi-slider model, one cable track is installed on both ends.

The cable track is installed on the opposite side compared to the sideway specification.

Cable track direction 5 (sideway, standard): CT5 Cable track direction 6 (opposite specification): CT6

LSA ICT2CT3CT4CT5CT6US1US2

US3US4US5US6UM1UM2UM3UM4UM5UM6

Cable trackfor user wiring

InstallationdirectionModel

None

Type S

Type M

1 (Standard)23456123456123456

【Model】

65

14

91

15

Type S

Horizontal specification Sideway specification

Cable track for user wiring

14

15

60

14

88

4091

Cable track for user wiring

14

40

85

Series Type Encoder type Applicable driver output Stroke Applicable controller Cable Options

Horizontal specification Sideway specification

Cable track direction 4 CT4

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

15 AAAA-BBBB

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eFlat typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

15 LSA-S6SS

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e Flat typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

LSA-S6SS

Caution

LSA S6SS I 100 T2

I: Incremental

specification

N: NoneS: 3mM: 5mX :

T2 : SCONSSELXSEL-P/-Q

Refer to the options

table below.

48:48mm

1248:1248mm

100 : 100W

* Refer to P. 13 for details on each item comprising the model name.

(Note 1) The maximum speed may not be attained if the stroke is short.

(Note 2) The maximum acceleration varies depending on the operating

conditions.

(Note 3) The maximum cable length is 20 m for the SCON/SSEL and 30 m

for the XSEL. Specify a desired length in units of meters.

(Example: X08 = 8 m)

StrokeLABCDE

12481534

72832

1328768

8.3

12001486

618028

1280743

8.1

11521438

613228

1232718

7.9

11041390

68428

1184693

7.7

10561342

63628

1136668

7.5

10081294

518824

1088643

7.3

9601246

514024

1040618

7.0

9121198

59224

992593

6.8

8641150

54424

944568

6.6

8161102

419620

896543

6.4

7681054

414820

848518

6.2

7201006

410020

800493

6.0

6729584

5220

752468

5.8

6249103

20416

704443

5.6

5768623

15616

656418

5.4

5288143

10816

608393

5.2

4807663

6016

560368

5.0

4327183

1216

512343

4.7

3846702

16412

464318

4.5

3366222

11612416293

4.3

28857426812368268

4.1

24052622012320243

3.9

1924781

1728

272218

3.7

1444301

1248

224193

3.5

963821768

176168

3.3

483341288

128143

3.1

Applicable Controller Specifications Applicable controller

Maximum controlled

axesOperating method

Power-supply voltage

Reference page

XSEL

SSEL

SCON

6 axes

2 axes

1 axis

Program

Program/positioner

Pulse train/positioner

Single-phase/ three-phase AC 200 V

Single-phase AC100/200VSingle-phase AC100/200V

→P53

→P52

→P51

Shaft type, 60 mm wideStandard type, single-slider

Model Specifications

Options Common Specifications

Model

LSA-S6SS-I-100- ① -T2- ② - ③

Encoder type

I: Incremental

Applicable drive output (per slider)

100

Stroke Specified in

48-mm steps (mm)

48~1248

Speed (Note 1) (mm/sec)

Payload (Note 2)

Horizontal (kg)

Vertical (kg)

Maximum thrust (N)

2500 3 − 60

Maximum acceleration (G) (Note 2)

3

Rated thrust (N)

15

* In the above model names, ① indicates the stroke, ② indicates the cable length, and ③ indicates the options.

4

0+0.

013

ME

D

SE MEHome5

160 63(35)

st

5

63(35)

L(st+286)

2 – φ4H7, depth 8

Cable

4 – M4, depth 10

(max10) E

60

837

8

6

25 255080

65 ± 0.02

16521675

PA × 10035 (B) PA × 100 3550 50

30

C – M4, depth 102 – slot, depth 3 (G)

2 - φ3H7, reamed depth 3

4 – M3, depth 5

54

43

1421

615

45(Re

amer

pitch

: ±0.0

2)

3.3

5.8

2.7 1.85.5

M3 T-slot(F)

81.5

76.5

3532

60

90 87

Detail view of G

Detail view of F

Reference surface

90 89

6060120

1

14585 60

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

Cable track for user wiring (type M) Cable track for user wiring (type S)

1914

1524

4940

14 19

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Type

■ Model Name

Series Encoder type Applicable drive output

Stroke Applicable controller

Cable length Options

Dimensions

Weight (kg)

Name

CT2~6

US1~6

UM1~6

→P14

→P14

→P14

Model Reference page Remarks

Cable track installation direction

Cable track for user wiring, type S

Cable track for user wiring, type M

Installation directions 2 to 6

Installation directions 1 to 6

Installation directions 1 to 6

Drive method

Positioning repeatability

Guide

Permissible load moment

Overhang load length

Base

Applicable controller

Cable length (Note 3)

Ambient operating temperature

Linear servo motor

±0.005mm

Built-in linear guide

Ma: 28.9N • m Mb: 41.2 • m Mc: 22.5N • m

300 mm or less in Ma direction / 300 mm or less in Mb/Mc directions

Material: Aluminum with white alumite treatment

T2: SCON, SSEL, XSEL-P/Q

N: No Cable S: 3m M: 5m X□□: Specified length

0 to 40°C, 85% RH or below (non-condensing)

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

AAAA-BBBB 16

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

LSA-S6SS 16

Dimensions – Sideway Specification (Standard)

124

5.52.71.8

5.8

3.3

+ 0

.01

0

3

4

C - M4, depth 102 – slot, depth 3 (G) 2 - φ3H7, reamed depth 3

30

50D5035PA × 100(B)PA × 10035

837

8

25502580± 0.0265

60

ME (*1)HomeME SE

155

M3 T-slot (F)

9089

51

914

6054

81.576.5

43

4 – M4, depth 102 - φ4H7, depth 8

(35) (35)

L (st+286)

5 5

6363 st 160

2415

14 19 19144049

84

Cable

Detail view of G

Detail view of F

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

Cable track for user wiring (type S)

Cable track for user wiring (type M)

45(Re

amer

pitch

: ±0.0

2)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions – Sideway Specification (Cable Track, Opposite)

2415

14 19 1914

4049

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

1 24

5.52.71.8

5.8

3.3

C – M4, depth 102 – slot, depth 3 (G)

2 – φ3H7, reamed depth 3

30

50 D 5035 PA × 100 (B) PA × 100 35

88

25502580 ±0.0265

60

ME (*1) Home MESE

155

M3 T-slot(F)

9089

51

914

60 54

81.576.5

43

4 – M4, depth 102 - φ4H7, depth 8

(35)(35)

L (st+286)

55

63 63st160

84

Cable

Detail view of F

Cable track for user wiring (type S)

Cable track for user wiring (type M)

37 45(Re

amer

pitch

: ±0.0

2)

3

4

Detail view of G

+0.

01

0

Stroke 12481534

7

28

32

1328

8.8

12001486

6

180

28

1280

8.6

11521438

6

132

28

1232

8.4

11041390

6

84

28

1184

8.2

10561342

6

36

28

1136

8.0

10081294

5

188

24

1088

7.8

9601246

5

140

24

1040

7.5

9121198

5

92

24

992

7.3

8641150

5

44

24

944

7.1

8161102

4

196

20

896

6.9

7681054

4

148

20

848

6.7

7201006

4

100

20

800

6.5

672958

4

52

20

752

6.3

624910

3

204

16

704

6.1

576862

3

156

16

656

5.9

528814

3

108

16

608

5.7

480766

3

60

16

560

5.5

432718

3

12

16

512

5.2

384670

2

164

12

464

5.0

336622

2

116

12

416

4.8

288574

2

68

12

368

4.6

240526

2

20

12

320

4.4

192478

1

172

8

272

4.2

144430

1

124

8

224

4.0

96382

1

76

8

176

3.8

48334

1

28

8

128

3.6

You can download CAD

StrokeLABCD

12481534

72832

13288.8

12001486

618028

12808.6

11521438

613228

12328.4

11041390

68428

11848.2

10561342

63628

11368.0

10081294

518824

10887.8

9601246

514024

10407.5

9121198

59224

9927.3

8641150

54424

9447.1

8161102

419620

8966.9

7681054

414820

8486.7

7201006

410020

8006.5

672958

45220

7526.3

624910

320416

7046.1

576862

315616

6565.9

528814

3108166085.7

480766

360165605.5

432718

312165125.2

384670

2164124645.0

336622

2116124164.8

288574

268123684.6

240526

220123204.4

192478

1172

82724.2

144430

1124

82244.0

96382

1768

1763.8

48334

1288

1283.6

Weight (kg)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Weight (kg)

LABCD

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

17 AAAA-BBBB

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eFlat typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e Flat typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

17 LSA−S6SM

Caution

Model Specifications

Common Specifications

(Note 1) The maximum speed may not be attained if the stroke is short.

(Note 2) The maximum acceleration varies depending on the operating

Conditions.

(Note 3) The maximum cable length is 20 m for the SCON/SSEL and 30 m

for the XSEL. Specify a desired length in units of meters.

(Example: X08 = 8 m)

LABCD

Weight (kg)

Stroke 4052622012320

5.4

8857426812368

5.6

1366222

11612416

5.8

1846702

16412464

6.0

23271831216512

6.2

28076636016560

6.4

3288143

10816

608

6.6

3768623

15616

656

6.8

4249103

20416

704

7.0

4729584

5220

752

7.2

5201006

410020

800

7.5

5681054

414820

848

7.7

6161102

419620

896

7.9

6641150

54424

944

8.1

7121198

59224

992

8.3

7601246

514024

1040

8.5

8081294

518824

1088

8.7

8561342

63628

1136

8.9

9041390

68428

1184

9.1

9521438

613228

1232

9.3

10001486

618028

1280

9.5

10481534

72832

1328

9.8

4

0+0.

013

54

43

2.7 1.85.5

M3 T-slot(F)

81.5

76.5

3532

60

90 87

Detail view of G

Detail view of F

Reference surface

(max10) (max10)

st

160 stME Home

MEHome5

160 63

(35)563

(35)

L(st+486)

2 – φ4H7, depth 84 – M4, depth 10

60

837

8

6

2525 5080

65 ±0.02

16 52 16754 – M3, depth 5

1421

615

45(Re

amer

pitch

: ±0.0

2)

90 89

6060120

1

14585 60

1914

1524

4940

14 19

Cable track for user wiring (type M) Cable track for user wiring (type S)

2 - φ3H7, reamed depth 3

2 – slot, depth 3 (G)

C – M4, depth 10

30

5035A × 100P(B)

D5035 A × 100P

3.3

5.8

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

40 (Minimum distance between sliders)

Shaft Type, 60 mm wideStandard type, multi-slider

Note) To change the cable track position to the opposite side, install the actuator by rotating it 180 degrees horizontally because the actuator is bilaterally symmetrical.

Model Encoder type

I: Incremental

Applicable drive output (per slider)

100

Stroke Specified in

48-mm steps (mm)

40~1048

Speed (Note 1) (mm/sec)

Payload (Note 2)

Horizontal (kg)

Vertical (kg)

Maximum thrust (N)

2500 3 − 60

Maximum acceleration (G) (Note 2)

3

Rated thrust (N)

15

* In the above model names, ① indicates the stroke, ② indicates the cable length, and ③ indicates the options.

Options

Name

CT5

US1/US5

UM1/UM5

→P14

→P14

→P14

Sideway specification

Model Reference page Remarks

LSA-S6SMLSA S6SM I 100 T2

I: Incremental

specification

N: NoneS: 3mM: 5mX□□:

T2 : SCONSSELXSEL-P/-Q

Refer to the options

table below.

40:40mm

1048:1048mm

100 : 100W

* Refer to P. 13 for details on each item comprising the model name.

Type

■ Model Name

Series Encoder type Applicable drive output

Stroke Applicable controller

Cable length Options

LSA-S6SM-I-100- ① -T2- ② - ③

Cable track installation direction

Cable track for user wiring, type S

Cable track for user wiring, type M

Standard specification/ sideway specification

Standard specification/ sideway specification

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions

適応コントローラ仕様Applicable Controller Specifications Applicable controller

Maximum controlled

axesOperating method

Power-supply voltage

Reference page

XSEL

SSEL

SCON

6 axes

2 axes

1 axis

Program

Program/positioner

Pulse train/positioner

Single-phase/ three-phase AC 200 V

Single-phase AC100/200VSingle-phase AC100/200V

→P53

→P52

→P51

Drive method

Positioning repeatability

Guide

Permissible load moment

Overhang load length

Base

Applicable controller

Cable length (Note 3)

Ambient operating temperature

Linear servo motor

±0.005mm

Built-in linear guide

Ma: 28.9N • m Mb: 41.2 • m Mc: 22.5N • m

300 mm or less in Ma direction / 300 mm or less in Mb/Mc directions

Material: Aluminum with white alumite treatment

T2: SCON, SSEL, XSEL-P/Q

N: No Cable S: 3m M: 5m X□□: Specified length

0 to 40°C, 85% RH or below (non-condensing)

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

AAAA-BBBB 18

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

Dimensions – Sideway Specification

124

2 - φ3H7, reamed depth 3 2 – slot, depth 3 (G)

PA × 100PA × 1003550

(B) 3550D

30

C – M4, depth 10

ME (*1) Home ME (*1)Home5 5(35) (35)

L (st+486)

6363 st

40(Minimumdistancebetweensliders) st

160160

±0.0265

255080

25

88

60

4 – M4, depth 102 - φ4H7, depth 8

84845.52.71.8

5.8

3.3

4

155

M3 T-slot (F)

9089

51

914

6054

81.576.5

43Detail view of G

Detail view of F

372415

14 19 1914

4049

+0.

01

03

Cable track for user wiring (type S)

Cable track for user wiring (type M)

45(Re

amer

pitch

: ±0.0

2)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

Stroke 40

LABCD

Weight (kg)

52622012320

6.4

88

57426812368

6.6

136

6222

11612416

6.8

184

6702

16412464

7.0

232

71831216512

7.2

280

76636016560

7.4

328

8143

10816608

7.6

376

8623

15616656

7.8

424

9103

20416704

8.0

472

9584

5220

752

8.2

520

10064

10020

800

8.5

568

10544

14820

848

8.7

616

11024

19620

896

8.9

664

11505

4424

944

9.1

712

11985

9224

992

9.3

760

12465

14024

1040

9.5

808

12945

18824

1088

9.7

856

13426

3628

1136

9.9

904

13906

8428

1184

10.1

952

14386

13228

1232

10.3

1000

14866

18028

1280

10.5

1048

15347

2832

1328

10.8

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

LSA-S6SM 18ELECTROMATE

Toll Free Phone (877) SERVO98Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

19 AAAA-BBBB

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eFlat typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e Flat typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

LSA-S8SS

StrokeLABCDE

603381328

132168

4.4

1203981928

192193

4.7

1804581

1528

252218

5.1

24051821212312243

5.4

30057827212372268

5.8

3606382

13212432293

6.1

4206982

19212492318

6.5

48075835216552343

6.9

5408183

11216

612393

7.2

6008783

17216

672418

7.6

6609384

3220

732443

7.9

7209984

9220

792468

8.3

7801058

415220

852493

8.7

8401118

51224

912543

9.0

9001178

57224

972568

9.4

9601238

513224

1032593

9.7

10201298

519224

1092618

10.1

10801358

65228

1152643

10.4

11401418

611228

1212693

10.8

12001478

617228

1272718

11.2

12601538

73232

1332743

11.5

13201598

79232

1392768

11.9

13801658

715232

1452793

12.2

14401718

81236

1512843

12.6

15001778

87236

1572868

12.9

15601838

813236

1632893

13.3

16201898

819236

1692918

13.7

M3 T-slot (F)

Reference surface

5

0+0.

012

4

2.7 1.85.5

Detail view of G

3.3

5.8

Detail view of F

C – M5, depth 10

2 – slot, depth 5 (G) 2 - φ4H7, reamed depth 5

50

50(D)5035 PA × 100 (B) PA × 100 35

ME SE MEHome

L (st+278)

5(45)59 st 160 59

(45)5

2 - φ4H7, depth 84 – M5, depth 10

25502580

65 ± 0.02

4 – M3, depth 5(max15) E

16 52 1675Cable

615

6

2160

(Ream

ed ho

le pit

ch: ±

0.02)

16.5

75

852

8

43

74

91100

97

86

35 8032

60 80140

19910

0

16585 80

1914

1524

4940

14 19

Cable track for user wiring (type S) Cable track for user wiring (type M)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

LSA S8SS I 100 T2

I: Incremental

specification

N: NoneS: 3mM: 5mX□□:

T2 : SCONSSELXSEL-P/-Q

Refer to the options

table below.

60:60mm

1620:1620mm

100 : 100W

* Refer to P. 13 for details on each item comprising the model name.

Type

■ Model Name

Series Encoder type Applicable drive output

Stroke Applicable controller

Cable length Options

LSA-S8SS Shaft type, 80 mmStandard type, single-slider

Model Specifications

Model Encoder type

I: Incremental

Applicable drive output (per slider)

100

Stroke Specified in

60-mm steps (mm)

60~1620

Speed (Note 1) (mm/sec)

Payload (Note 2)

Horizontal (kg)

Vertical (kg)

Maximum thrust (N)

2500 5 − 100

Maximum acceleration (G) (Note 2)

3

Rated thrust (N)

25

* In the above model names, ① indicates the stroke, ② indicates the cable length, and ③ indicates the options.

Options

Name

CT2~6

US1~6

UM1~6

→P14

→P14

→P14

Model Reference page Remarks

LSA-S8SS-I-100- ① -T2- ② - ③

Cable track installation direction

Cable track for user wiring, type S

Cable track for user wiring, type M

Common Specifications

Installation directions 2 to 6

Installation directions 1 to 6

Installation directions 1 to 6

Caution

(Note 1) The maximum speed may not be attained if the stroke is short.

(Note 2) The maximum acceleration varies depending on the operating

conditions.

(Note 3) The maximum cable length is 20 m for the SCON/SSEL and 30 m

for the XSEL. Specify a desired length in units of meters.

(Example: X08 = 8 m)

適応コントローラ仕様Applicable Controller Specifications Applicable controller

Maximum controlled

axesOperating method

Power-supply voltage

Reference page

XSEL

SSEL

SCON

6 axes

2 axes

1 axis

Program

Program/positioner

Pulse train/positioner

Single-phase/ three-phase AC 200 V

Single-phase AC100/200VSingle-phase AC100/200V

→P53

→P52

→P51

Weight (kg)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions

Drive method

Positioning repeatability

Guide

Permissible load moment

Overhang load length

Base

Applicable controller

Cable length (Note 3)

Ambient operating temperature

Linear servo motor

±0.005mm

Built-in linear guide

Ma: 42.2N • m Mb: 60.3 • m Mc: 37.6N • m

300 mm or less in Ma direction / 300 mm or less in Mb/Mc directions

Material: Aluminum with white alumite treatment

T2: SCON, SSEL, XSEL-P/Q

N: No Cable S: 3m M: 5m X□□: Specified length

0 to 40°C, 85% RH or below (non-condensing)

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

AAAA-BBBB 20

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

LSA-S8SS

StrokeLABCD

60338

1328

132

4.9

120398

1928

192

5.2

180458

1152

8252

5.6

240518

21212312

5.9

300578

27212372

6.3

360638

213212432

6.6

420698

219212492

7.0

480758

35216552

7.4

540818

311216612

7.7

600878

317216672

8.1

660938

43220732

8.4

720998

49220792

8.8

7801058

415220

852

9.2

8401118

51224

912

9.5

9001178

57224

972

9.9

9601238

513224

1032

10.2

10201298

519224

1092

10.6

10801358

65228

1152

10.9

11401418

611228

1212

11.3

12001478

617228

1272

11.7

12601538

73232

1332

12.0

13201598

79232

1392

12.4

13801658

715232

1452

12.7

14401718

812

36

1512

13.1

15001778

87236

1572

13.4

15601838

813236

1632

13.8

16201898

819236

1692

14.2

1134

C – M5, depth 10 2 – slot, depth 5 (G)

50

50(D)35PA × 100(B)

50

PA × 10035

175

914

8074

91

8643

10099

61

ME SE ME (*1)Home5(45) (45)5

L (st+278)59 st 59160

88

25502580

±0.0265

84

Cable

2415

14 19 1914

4049

75 52

5

4

5.52.71.8

5.8

3.3

+0.

012

0

Detail view of G

Detail view of F

2 – φ4H7, reamed depth 5

60(Re

amed

pitch

: ±0.0

2)

4 – M5, depth 102 – φ4H7, reamed depth 8

Cable track for user wiring (type S)

Cable track for user wiring (type M)

M3 T-slot (F)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

5

4

11 34

50

50 (D)35 (B)

50

PA × 100 35

175

914

80 74

9186

43

10099

61

MESEME�(*1) Home5 (45)(45) 5

L (st+278)59st59 160

88

25502580±0.0265

84

5.52.71.8

5.8

3.3

Cable

+0.

012

0

Detail view of G

Detail view of F

52 75

2415

14 19 1914

4049

Cable track for user wiring (type S)

Cable track for user wiring (type M)

PA × 100

C – M5, depth 102 – slot, depth 5 (G)

2 - φ4H7, reamed depth 5

4 – M5, depth 102 - φ4H7, reamed depth 8

60(Re

amed

pitch

: ±0.0

2)

M3 T-slot (F)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

StrokeLABCD

60338

1328

1324.9

120398

1928

1925.2

180458

1152

82525.6

240518

212123125.9

300578

272123726.3

360638

2132124326.6

420698

2192124927.0

480758

352165527.4

540818

3112166127.7

600878

3172166728.1

660938

432207328.4

720998

492207928.8

7801058

415220

8529.2

8401118

51224

9129.5

9001178

57224

9729.9

9601238

513224

103210.2

10201298

519224

109210.6

10801358

65228

115210.9

11401418

611228

121211.3

12001478

617228

127211.7

12601538

73232

133212.0

13201598

79232

139212.4

13801658

715232

145212.7

14401718

81236

151213.1

15001778

87236

157213.4

15601838

813236

163213.8

16201898

819236

169214.2

Dimensions – Sideway Specification (Standard)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions – Sideway Specification (Cable Track, Opposite)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Weight (kg)

Weight(kg)

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

21 AAAA-BBBB

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eFlat typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e Flat typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

LSA-S8SM

StrokeLABCD

5

0+0.

012

4

2.7 1.85.5

Detail view of G

Detail view of F

Reference surface

st20 (Minimum distance between sliders)

st160

(max15) (max15)

(45)59

L (st+458)ME

MEHomeHome

5(45)59

160 59

(45)5

615

621

16.5

75

852

8

16 52 1675

25502580

65±0.02

3.3

5.8

60 80140

19910

0

16585 80

1914

1524

4940

14 19

Cable track for user wiring (type S) Cable track for user wiring (type M)

M3 T-slot (F)

60(Re

amed

hole

pitch

: ±0.0

2)

50

50(D)5035 (B) 35

43

74

91100

97

86

35 8032

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

PA × 100 PA × 100

C – M5, depth 10

4 – M5, depth 10

4 – M3, depth 5

2 – slot, depth 5 (G) 2 – φ4H7, reamed depth 5

2 – φ4H7, depth 8

Shaft type, 80 mm wideStandard type, multi-slider

60518212123127.4

120578272123727.7

1806382

132124328.1

2406982

192124928.4

300758352165528.8

3608183

112166129.1

4208783

172166729.5

4809384

3220

7329.9

5409984

9220

79210.2

6001058

415220

85210.6

6601118

51224

91210.9

7201178

57224

97211.3

7801238

513224

103211.6

8401298

519224

109212.0

9001358

65228

115212.4

9601418

611228

121212.7

10201478

617228

127213.1

10801538

73232

133213.4

11401598

79232

139213.8

12001658

715232

145214.1

12601718

81236

151214.5

13201778

87236

157214.9

13801838

813236

163215.2

14401898

819236

169215.6

LSA S8SM I 100 T2

I: Incremental

specification

N: NoneS: 3mM: 5mX□□:

T2 : SCONSSELXSEL-P/-Q

Refer to the options

table below.

60:60mm

1440:1440mm

100 : 100W

* Refer to P. 13 for details on each item comprising the model name.

Type

■ Model Name

Series Encoder type Applicable drive output

Stroke Applicable controller

Cable length Options

LSA-S8SM

Model Specifications

Common Specifications

Note) To change the cable track position to the opposite side, install the actuator by rotating it 180 degrees horizontally because the actuator is bilaterally symmetrical.

Model Encoder type

I: Incremental

Applicable drive output (per slider)

100

Stroke Specified in

60-mm steps (mm)

60~1440

Speed (Note 1) (mm/sec)

Payload (Note 2)

Horizontal (kg)

Vertical (kg)

Maximum thrust (N)

2500 5 − 100

Maximum acceleration (G) (Note 2)

3

Rated thrust (N)

25

* In the above model names, ① indicates the stroke, ② indicates the cable length, and ③ indicates the options.

Options

Name

CT5

US1/US5

UM1/UM5

→P14

→P14

→P14

Sideway specification

Model Reference page Remarks

LSA-S8SM-I-100- ① -T2- ② - ③

Cable track installation direction

Cable track for user wiring, type S

Cable track for user wiring, type M

Standard specification/ sideway specification

Standard specification/ sideway specification

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions

Caution

(Note 1) The maximum speed may not be attained if the stroke is short.

(Note 2) The maximum acceleration varies depending on the operating

conditions.

(Note 3) The maximum cable length is 20 m for the SCON/SSEL and 30 m

for the XSEL. Specify a desired length in units of meters.

(Example: X08 = 8 m)

適応コントローラ仕様Applicable Controller Specifications Applicable controller

Maximum controlled

axesOperating method

Power-supply voltage

Reference page

XSEL

SSEL

SCON

6 axes

2 axes

1 axis

Program

Program/positioner

Pulse train/positioner

Single-phase/ three-phase AC 200 V

Single-phase AC100/200VSingle-phase AC100/200V

→P53

→P52

→P51

Drive method

Positioning repeatability

Guide

Permissible load moment

Overhang load length

Base

Applicable controller

Cable length (Note 3)

Ambient operating temperature

Linear servo motor

±0.005mm

Built-in linear guide

Ma: 42.2N • m Mb: 60.3 • m Mc: 37.6N • m

300 mm or less in Ma direction / 300 mm or less in Mb/Mc directions

Material: Aluminum with white alumite treatment

T2: SCON, SSEL, XSEL-P/Q

N: No Cable S: 3m M: 5m X□□: Specified length

0 to 40°C, 85% RH or below (non-condensing)

Weight(kg)

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

AAAA-BBBB 22

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

20(Minimum distance

between sliders)

1134

50

505035 35

(D)(B)

L (st+458)

ME (*1)HomeHomeME (*1)(45) 5

59 160 stst

5

59

(45)

84845

4

255025

±0.026580

88

6199

100

438691

74 804

91

160

175

5.8

3.3

2.75.5

1.8

2415

14 19 1914

4049

Detail view of G

Detail view of F

+0.

012

0

5275

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

Cable track for user wiring (type S)

Cable track for user wiring (type M)

PA × 100 PA × 100

C – M5, depth 102 – slot, depth 5 (G)

2 - φ4H7, reamed depth 5

M3 T-slot (F)

60(Re

amer

pitch

: ±0.0

2)

4 – M5, depth 102 - φ4H7, reamed depth 8

Stroke

LABCD

Weight(kg)

60

51821212312

8.4

120

57827212372

8.7

180

6382

13212432

9.1

240

6982

19212492

9.4

300

75835216552

9.8

360

8183

11216612

10.1

420

8783

17216672

10.5

480

93843220732

10.9

540

99849220792

11.2

600

10584

15220852

11.6

660

11185

1224

912

11.9

720

11785

7224

972

12.3

780

12385

13224

1032

12.6

840

12985

19224

1092

13.0

900

13586

5228

1152

13.4

960

14186

11228

1212

13.7

1020

14786

17228

1272

14.1

1080

15387

3232

1332

14.4

1140

15987

9232

1392

14.8

1200

16587

15232

1452

15.1

1260

17188

1236

1512

15.5

1320

17788

7236

1572

15.9

1380

18388

13236

1632

16.2

1440

18988

19236

1692

16.6

LSA-S8SM

Dimensions – Sideway Specification

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

23 AAAA-BBBB

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eFlat typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e Flat typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

LSA-S8HS

5

0+0.

012

4

2.7 1.85.5

Detail view of G

Detail view of F

3.3

5.8

60 80140

19910

0

16585 80

1914

1524

4940

14 19

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

Cable track for user wiring (type S) Cable track for user wiring (type M)

328035

86 91

74

43

97100

Cable 75165216

E

216

156

65±0.0280

25 50 25

5275

88

5 (45)89160st89

(45) 5

L (st+338)

Home MESEME

35(B)PA × 100 PA × 1003550 (D) 50

C – M5, depth 1050

16.5

4 – M5, depth 102 - φ4H7, depth 8

2 - φ4H7, reamed depth 5

M3 T-slot (F)

Reference surface

4 – M3, depth 5

60(Re

amed

hole p

itch: ±

0.02)

2 – slot, depth 5 (G)

StrokeLABCDE

Weight(kg)

603981928

192193

5.0

1204581

1528

252218

5.4

18051821212312243

5.7

24057827212372268

6.1

3006382

13212432293

6.4

3606982

19212492318

6.8

42075835216552343

7.1

4808183

11216612393

7.5

5408783

17216

672418

7.9

6009384

3220

732443

8.2

6609984

9220

792468

8.6

7201058

415220

852493

8.9

7801118

51224

912543

9.3

8401178

57224

972568

9.6

9001238

513224

1032593

10.0

9601298

519224

1092618

10.4

10201358

65228

1152643

10.7

10801418

611228

1212693

11.1

11401478

617228

1272718

11.4

12001538

73232

1332743

11.8

12601598

79232

1392768

12.1

13201658

715232

1452793

12.5

13801718

81236

1512843

12.9

14401778

87236

1572868

13.2

15001838

813236

1632893

13.6

15601898

819236

1692918

13.9

16201958

95240

1752943

14.3

Shaft type, 80 mm wideHigh-thrust type, single-slider

LSA S8HS I 100 T2

I: Incremental

specification

N: NoneS: 3mM: 5mX□□: Specified length

T2 : SCONSSELXSEL-P/-Q

Refer to the options

table below.

60:60mm

1620:1620mm

100 : 100W

* Refer to P. 13 for details on each item comprising the model name.

Type

■ Model Name

Series Encoder type Applicable drive output

Stroke Applicable controller

Cable length Options

LSA-S8HS

Model Specifications

Options Common Specifications

Model

LSA-S8HS-I-100- ① -T2- ② - ③

Encoder type

I: Incremental

Applicable drive output (per slider)

100

Stroke Specified in

60-mm steps (mm)

60~1620

Speed (Note 1) (mm/sec)

Payload (Note 2)

Horizontal (kg)

Vertical (kg)

Maximum thrust (N)

2500 7 − 140

Maximum acceleration (G) (Note 2)

3

Rated thrust (N)

35

* In the above model names, ① indicates the stroke, ② indicates the cable length, and ③ indicates the options.

Name

CT2~6

US1~6

UM1~6

→P14

→P14

→P14

Model Reference page Remarks

Cable track installation direction

Cable track for user wiring, type S

Cable track for user wiring, type M

Installation directions 2 to 6

Installation directions 1 to 6

Installation directions 1 to 6

Caution

(Note 1) The maximum speed may not be attained if the stroke is short.

(Note 2) The maximum acceleration varies depending on the operating

conditions.

(Note 3) The maximum cable length is 20 m for the SCON/SSEL and 30 m

for the XSEL. Specify a desired length in units of meters.

(Example: X08 = 8 m)

適応コントローラ仕様Applicable Controller Specifications Applicable controller

Maximum controlled

axesOperating method

Power-supply voltage

Reference page

XSEL

SSEL

SCON

6 axes

2 axes

1 axis

Program

Program/positioner

Pulse train/positioner

Single-phase/ three-phase AC 200 V

Single-phase AC100/200VSingle-phase AC100/200V

→P53

→P52

→P51

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions

Drive method

Positioning repeatability

Guide

Permissible load moment

Overhang load length

Base

Applicable controller

Cable length (Note 3)

Ambient operating temperature

Linear servo motor

±0.005mm

Built-in linear guide

Ma: 42.2N • m Mb: 60.3 • m Mc: 37.6N • m

300 mm or less in Ma direction / 300 mm or less in Mb/Mc directions

Material: Aluminum with white alumite treatment

T2: SCON, SSEL, XSEL-P/Q

N: No Cable S: 3m M: 5m X□□: Specified length

0 to 40°C, 85% RH or below (non-condensing)

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

AAAA-BBBB 24

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

StrokeLABCD

60398

1928

192

5.5

120458

1152

8252

5.9

180518

21212312

6.2

240578

27212372

6.6

300638

213212432

6.9

360698

219212492

7.3

420758

35216552

7.6

480818

311216612

8.0

540878

317216672

8.4

600938

43220732

8.7

660998

49220792

9.1

7201058

415220852

9.4

7801118

51224

912

9.8

8401178

57224

972

10.1

9001238

513224

1032

10.5

9601298

519224

1092

10.9

10201358

65228

1152

11.2

10801418

611228

1212

11.6

11401478

617228

1272

11.9

12001538

73232

1332

12.3

12601598

79232

1392

12.6

13201658

715232

1452

13.1

13801718

81236

1512

13.4

14401778

87236

1572

13.7

15001838

813236

1632

14.1

15601898

819236

1692

14.4

16201958

95240

1752

14.8

Cable

50

505035 35(B)

(D)

L (st+338)

(45)(45)

89 89

84

Home ME (*1)255025

±0.026580

88

5SEME

160st

5

5

4

1134

175

914

8074

9186

43

10099

61

5.52.71.8

5.8

3.3

2415

14 19 1914

4049

+0.

012

0

Detail view of G

Detail view of F

5275

PA × 100PA × 100

C – M5, depth 10 2 – slot, depth 5 (G)

2 - φ4H7, reamed depth 5

Cable track for user wiring (type S)

Cable track for user wiring (type M)

M3 T-slot (F)

4 – M5, depth 102 – φ4H7, depth 8

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

60(Re

amer

pitch

: ±0.0

2)

Cable

C – M5, depth 10 2 – slot, depth 5 (G)

2 - φ4H7, reamed depth 5

84

HomeME (*1) 255025

±0.026580

88

5

160MESE

(45)

89L (st+338)

89

5 (45)

st

5035(B) PA × 10035

(D)

PA × 10050

50

6199100

438691

74804

9117

5

M3 T-slot (F)

5

4

11 34

5.52.71.8

5.8

3.3

2415

14 19 1914

4049

7552

+0.

012

0

Detail view of G

Detail view of F

Cable track for user wiring (type S)

Cable track for user wiring (type M)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

4 – M5, depth 102 - φ4H7, reamed depth 8

60(Re

amer

pitch

: ±0.0

2)

StrokeLABCD

60398

1928

192

5.5

120458

1152

8252

5.9

180518

21212312

6.2

240578

27212372

6.6

300638

213212432

6.9

360698

219212492

7.3

420758

35216552

7.6

480818

311216612

8.0

540878

317216672

8.4

600938

43220732

8.7

660998

49220792

9.1

7201058

415220852

9.4

7801118

51224

912

9.8

8401178

57224

972

10.1

9001238

513224

1032

10.5

9601298

519224

1092

10.9

10201358

65228

1152

11.2

10801418

611228

1212

11.6

11401478

617228

1272

11.9

12001538

73232

1332

12.3

12601598

79232

1392

12.6

13201658

715232

1452

13.1

13801718

81236

1512

13.4

14401778

87236

1572

13.7

15001838

813236

1632

14.1

15601898

819236

1692

14.4

16201958

95240

1752

14.8

Dimensions – Sideway Specification (Standard)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions – Sideway Specification (Cable Track, Opposite)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

LSA-S8HS

Weight(kg)

Weight(kg)

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

25 AAAA-BBBB

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eFlat typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e Flat typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

LSA-S8HM

StrokeLABCD

Weight(kg)

328035

86 91

74

43

97100

Reference surface

Detail view of G

Detail view of F

M3 T-slot (F)

5

0+0.

012

4

2.7 1.85.5

stst

5 (45)(45)

L (st+578)

8989160

160(45) 5

MEME

65±0.0280

25 50 25

75165216

852

8

75

16.5

216

156

3.3

5.8

C – M5, depth 102 – slot,

depth 5 (G) 2 – φ4H7, reamed depth 5

Home

2 - φ4H7, depth 8

35(B)35(D)50 50

50

1914

1524

4940

14 19

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

Cable track for user wiring (type S) Cable track for user wiring (type M)

PA × 100 PA × 100

80 (Minimum distance between sliders)Home

60(Re

amed

hole p

itch: ±

0.02)

4 – M3, depth 5

4 – M5, depth 10

60 80140

199100

16585 80

Shaft type, 80 mm wideHigh-thrust type, multi-slider

606382

13212432

8.6

1206982

19212492

9.0

18075835216552

9.3

2408183

11216612

9.7

3008783

17216672

10.1

36093843220732

10.4

4209984

9220

792

10.8

4801058

415220

852

11.1

5401118

51224

912

11.5

6001178

57224

972

11.9

6601238

513224

1032

12.2

7201298

519224

1092

12.6

7801358

65228

1152

12.9

8401418

611228

1212

13.3

9001478

617228

1272

13.6

9601538

73232

1332

14.0

10201598

79232

1392

14.4

10801658

715232

1452

14.7

11401718

81236

1512

15.1

12001778

87236

1572

15.4

12601838

813236

1632

15.8

13201898

819236

1692

16.1

13801958

95240

1752

16.5

LSA S8HM I 100 T2

I: Incremental

specification

N: NoneS: 3mM: 5mX□□:

T2 : SCONSSELXSEL-P/-Q

Refer to the options

table below.

60:60mm

1380:1380mm

100 : 100W

* Refer to P. 13 for details on each item comprising the model name.

Type

■ Model Name

Series Encoder type Applicable drive output

Stroke Applicable controller

Cable length Options

Caution

(Note 1) The maximum speed may not be attained if the stroke is short.

(Note 2) The maximum acceleration varies depending on the operating

conditions.

(Note 3) The maximum cable length is 20 m for the SCON/SSEL and 30 m

for the XSEL. Specify a desired length in units of meters.

(Example: X08 = 8 m)

適応コントローラ仕様Applicable Controller Specifications Applicable controller

Maximum controlled

axesOperating method

Power-supply voltage

Reference page

XSEL

SSEL

SCON

6 axes

2 axes

1 axis

Program

Program/positioner

Pulse train/positioner

Single-phase/ three-phase AC 200 V

Single-phase AC100/200VSingle-phase AC100/200V

→P53

→P52

→P51

LSA-S8HM

Model Specifications

Common Specifications

Note) To change the cable track position to the opposite side, install the actuator by rotating it 180 degrees horizontally because the actuator is bilaterally symmetrical.

Model Encoder type

I: Incremental

Applicable drive output (per slider)

100

Stroke Specified in

60-mm steps (mm)

60~1380

Speed (Note 1) (mm/sec)

Payload (Note 2)

Horizontal (kg)

Vertical (kg)

Maximum thrust (N)

2500 7 − 140

Maximum acceleration (G) (Note 2)

3

Rated thrust (N)

35

* In the above model names, ① indicates the stroke, ② indicates the cable length, and ③ indicates the options.

Options

Name

CT5

US1/US5

UM1/UM5

→P14

→P14

→P14

Sideway specification

Model Reference page Remarks

LSA-S8HM-I-100- ① -T2- ② - ③

Cable track installation direction

Cable track for user wiring, type S

Cable track for user wiring, type M

Standard specification/ sideway specification

Standard specification/ sideway specification

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions

Drive method

Positioning repeatability

Guide

Permissible load moment

Overhang load length

Base

Applicable controller

Cable length (Note 3)

Ambient operating temperature

Linear servo motor

±0.005mm

Built-in linear guide

Ma: 42.2N • m Mb: 60.3 • m Mc: 37.6N • m

300 mm or less in Ma direction / 300 mm or less in Mb/Mc directions

Material: Aluminum with white alumite treatment

T2: SCON, SSEL, XSEL-P/Q

N: No Cable S: 3m M: 5m X□□: Specified length

0 to 40°C, 85% RH or below (non-condensing)

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

AAAA-BBBB 26

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

L (st+578)

89

(45)

89

(45) 80 (Minimum distance

between sliders) stst

ME�(*1)HomeHomeME (*1)5

160

84

255025

±0.026580

88

160

5035

(D)35(B)

50

50

5

84

1134

5

4

6199100

438691

74 804

9117

5

5.8

3.3

2.75.5

1.8

5275

+0.

012

0

2415

14 19 1914

4049

PA × 100 PA × 100

C – M5, depth 102 – slot, depth 5 (G)

2 - φ4H7, reamed depth 5

Cable track for user wiring (type S)

Cable track for user wiring (type M)

Detail view of G

Detail view of F

M3 T-slot (F)

60(Re

amer

pitch

: ±0.0

2)

4 – M5, depth 102 – φ4H7, depth 8

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

Stroke

LABCD

Weight(kg)

60

6382

13212432

9.6

120

6982

19212492

10.0

180

75835216552

10.3

240

8183

11216612

10.7

300

8783

17216672

11.1

360

93843220732

11.4

420

99849220792

11.8

480

10584

15220852

12.1

540

111851224912

12.5

600

11785

7224

972

12.9

660

12385

13224

1032

13.2

720

12985

19224

1092

13.6

780

13586

5228

1152

13.9

840

14186

11228

1212

14.3

900

14786

17228

1272

14.6

960

15387

3232

1332

15.0

1020

15987

9232

1392

15.4

1080

16587

15232

1452

15.7

1140

17188

1236

1512

16.1

1200

17788

7236

1572

16.4

1260

18388

13236

1632

16.8

1320

18988

19236

1692

17.1

1380

19589

5240

1752

17.5

Dimensions – Sideway Specification

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

LSA-S8HM

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

27 AAAA-BBBB

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eFlat typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

LSA-S10SS

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e Flat typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

StrokeLABCDE

904301448

144198

8.4

1805201

1348

234248

9.2

2706101

2248

324273

10.1

36070021412414323

10.9

4507902

10412504373

11.7

5408802

19412594423

12.6

6309702

28412

684473

13.4

7201060

37416774498

14.2

8101150

316416

864548

15.1

9001240

325416

954598

15.9

9901330

44420

1044648

16.7

10801420

413420

1134698

17.6

11701510

422420

1224723

18.4

12601600

51424

1314773

19.2

13501690

510424

1404823

20.1

14401780

519424

1494873

20.9

15301870

528424

1584923

21.7

16201960

67428

1674948

22.6

17102050

616428

1764998

23.4

18002140

625428

18541048

24.2

18902230

74432

19441098

25.1

19802320

713432

20341148

25.9

20702410

722432

21241173

26.7

5

0+0.

012

4

2.7 1.85.5

M3 T-slot (F)

Reference surface

3.3

5.8

Detail view of G

Detail view of F

80(Re

amer

pitch

: ±0.0

2)

70

100(D)10020 (B) 20

ME SE Home ME

L (st+340)

(55)90 st 160 90

(55)5 5

25 255085

65±0.02

16521675E

615

621

16.5

97 7010

10

44

93

111

10612

011

7

3532

100

10060160

112

011

9

18585 100

1914

1524

4940

14 19

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

Cable track for user wiring (type S) Cable track for user wiring (type M)

PA × 150PA × 150

Cable4 – M3, depth 5

4 – M6, depth 102 – φ6H7, depth 10

2 – φ4H7, reamed depth 5 C – M5, depth 10

2 – slot, depth 5 (G)

Shaft type, 100 mm wideStandard type, single-slider

LSA S10SS I 200 T2

I: Incremental

specification

N: NoneS: 3mM: 5mX□□:

T2 : SCONSSELXSEL-P/-Q

Refer to the options

table below.

90:90mm

2070:2070mm

200 : 200W

* Refer to P. 13 for details on each item comprising the model name.

Type

■ Model Name

Series Encoder type Applicable drive output

Stroke Applicable controller

Cable length Options

LSA-S10SS

Model Specifications

Model Encoder type

I: Incremental

Applicable drive output (per slider)

200

Stroke Specified in

90-mm steps (mm)

90~2070

Speed (Note 1) (mm/sec)

Payload (Note 2)

Horizontal (kg)

Vertical (kg)

Maximum thrust (N)

2500 15 − 260

Maximum acceleration (G) (Note 2)

3

Rated thrust (N)

65

* In the above model names, ① indicates the stroke, ② indicates the cable length, and ③ indicates the options.

Options

Name

CT2~6

US1~6

UM1~6

→P14

→P14

→P14

Model Reference page Remarks

LSA-S10SS-I-200- ① -T2- ② - ③

Cable track installation direction

Cable track for user wiring, type S

Cable track for user wiring, type M

Common Specifications

Installation directions 2 to 6

Installation directions 1 to 6

Installation directions 1 to 6

Drive method

Positioning repeatability

Guide

Permissible load moment

Overhang load length

Base

Applicable controller

Cable length (Note 3)

Ambient operating temperature

Linear servo motor

±0.005mm

Built-in linear guide

Ma: 57.4N • m Mb: 81.9 • m Mc: 60.8N • m

300 mm or less in Ma direction / 300 mm or less in Mb/Mc directions

Material: Aluminum with white alumite treatment

T2: SCON, SSEL, XSEL-P/Q

N: No Cable S: 3m M: 5m X□□: Specified length

0 to 40°C, 85% RH or below (non-condensing)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions

Caution

(Note 1) The maximum speed may not be attained if the stroke is short.

(Note 2) The maximum acceleration varies depending on the operating

conditions.

(Note 3) The maximum cable length is 20 m for the SCON/SSEL and 30 m

for the XSEL. Specify a desired length in units of meters.

(Example: X08 = 8 m)

適応コントローラ仕様Applicable Controller Specifications Applicable controller

Maximum controlled

axesOperating method

Power-supply voltage

Reference page

XSEL

SSEL

SCON

6 axes

2 axes

1 axis

Program

Program/positioner

Pulse train/positioner

Single-phase/ three-phase AC 200 V

Single-phase AC100/200VSingle-phase AC100/200V

→P53

→P52

→P51

Weight(kg)

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

AAAA-BBBB 28

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

LSA-S10SS

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

StrokeLABCD

Weight(kg)

90430

1448

144

8.9

180520

1134

8234

9.7

270610

1224

8324

10.6

360700

21412414

11.4

450790

210412504

12.3

540880

219412594

13.1

630970

228412684

13.9

7201060

37416774

14.7

8101150

316416864

15.6

9001240

325416954

16.4

9901330

44420

1044

17.2

10801420

413420

1134

18.1

11701510

422420

1224

18.9

12601600

51424

1314

19.7

13501690

510424

1404

20.6

14401780

519424

1494

21.4

15301870

528424

1584

22.2

16201960

67428

1674

23.1

17102050

616428

1764

23.9

18002140

625428

1854

24.7

18902230

74432

1944

25.6

19802320

713432

2034

26.4

20702410

722432

2124

27.2

3154100 100

2020(D)(B)

70

1010

ME SE ME (*1)

L (st+340)90

(55) 5

st 90

(55)5

160255025

85±0.0265

195

914

100

93

120119

81

111106

44

5

4

84

5.52.71.8

5.8

3.3

7097

+0.

012

0

2415

14 19 1914

4049

PA × 150 PA × 150

C – M5, depth 10 2 – slot, depth 5 (G)

2 – φ4H7, reamed depth 5

Cable

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

80(R

eam

er p

itch:

±0.

02)

Home

4 – M6, depth 102 – φ6H7, depth 10

M3 T-slot (F)

Cable track for user wiring (type S)

Cable track for user wiring (type M)

Detail view of G

Detail view of F

ME

195

914

100

93

120119

81

111106

44

160

5(55)

90 st

5 (55)

90L (st+340)

70

100 (D)20 (B) 20

100

ME (*1) Home

1010

258550 25

±0.0265

31 54

SE

845

4

5.8

3.3

2.75.5

1.8

9770

+0.

012

0

2415

14 19 1914

4049

Cable track for user wiring (type S)

Cable track for user wiring (type M)

Detail view of G

Detail view of F

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

M3 T-slot (F)

80(R

eam

er p

itch:

±0.

02)

4 – M6, depth 102 – φ6H7, depth 10

Cable

C – M5, depth 10 2 – φ4H7, reamed depth 5 2 – slot, depth 5 (G)

PA × 150PA × 150

StrokeLABCD

Weight(kg)

90430

1448

144

8.9

180520

1134

8234

9.7

270610

1224

8324

10.6

360700

21412414

11.4

450790

210412504

12.3

540880

219412594

13.1

630970

228412684

13.9

7201060

37416774

14.7

8101150

316416864

15.6

9001240

325416954

16.4

9901330

44420

1044

17.2

10801420

413420

1134

18.1

11701510

422420

1224

18.9

12601600

51424

1314

19.7

13501690

510424

1404

20.6

14401780

519424

1494

21.4

15301870

528424

1584

22.2

16201960

67428

1674

23.1

17102050

616428

1764

23.9

18002140

625428

1854

24.7

18902230

74432

1944

25.6

19802320

713432

2034

26.4

20702410

722432

2124

27.2

Dimensions – Sideway Specification (Standard)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions – Sideway Specification (Cable Track, Opposite)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

29 AAAA-BBBB

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eFlat typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

LSA-S10SM

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e Flat typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

StrokeLABCD

Weight(kg)

5

0+0.

012

4

2.7 1.85.5

Reference surface

stst160

ME Home Home ME

L (st+550)

(55)90

160 90

(55)5 5

615

621

16.5

97

1070

10

16521675

25 255085

65±0.02

3.3

5.8

70

100(D)10020 (B) 20

44

93

111

10612

011

7

3532

100

10060160

112

011

9

18585 100

1914

1524

4940

14 19

Cable track for user wiring (type S) Cable track for user wiring (type M)

Detail view of G

Detail view of F

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

M3 T-slot (F)

PA × 150 PA × 150

50 (Minimum distance between sliders)

80(Re

amer

pitch

: ±0.0

2)

4 – M3, depth 5

4 – M6, depth 102 – φ6H7, depth 10

C – M5, depth 10

2 – slot, depth 5 (G)

2 – φ4H7, reamed depth 5

Shaft type, 100 mm wideStandard type, multi-slider

606101

2248

324

13.5

15070021412414

14.4

2407902

10412504

15.2

3308802

19412594

16.0

4209702

28412684

16.9

5101060

37416774

17.7

6001150

316416

864

18.6

6901240

325416

954

19.4

7801330

44420

1044

20.2

8701420

413420

1134

21.1

9601510

422420

1224

21.9

10501600

51424

1314

22.7

11401690

510424

1404

23.6

12301780

519424

1494

24.4

13201870

528424

1584

25.2

14101960

67428

1674

26.1

15002050

616428

1764

26.9

15902140

625428

1854

27.7

16802230

74432

1944

28.6

17702320

713432

2034

29.4

18602410

722432

2124

30.2

LSA S10SM I 200 T2

I: Incremental

specification

N: NoneS: 3mM: 5mX□□:

T2 : SCONSSELXSEL-P/-Q

Refer to the options

table below.

60:60mm

1860:1860mm

200 : 200W

* Refer to P. 13 for details on each item comprising the model name.

Type

■ Model Name

Series Encoder type Applicable drive output

Stroke Applicable controller

Cable length Options

LSA-S10SM

Model Specifications

Common Specifications

Note) To change the cable track position to the opposite side, install the actuator by rotating it 180 degrees horizontally because the actuator is bilaterally symmetrical.

Model Encoder type

I: Incremental

Applicable drive output (per slider)

200

Stroke Specified in

90-mm steps (mm)

60~1860

Speed (Note 1) (mm/sec)

Payload (Note 2)

Horizontal (kg)

Vertical (kg)

Maximum thrust (N)

2500 15 − 260

Maximum acceleration (G) (Note 2)

3

Rated thrust (N)

65

* In the above model names, ① indicates the stroke, ② indicates the cable length, and ③ indicates the options.

Options

Name

CT5

US1/US5

UM1/UM5

→P14

→P14

→P14

Sideway specification

Model Reference page Remarks

LSA-S10SM-I-200- ① -T2- ② - ③

Cable track installation direction

Cable track for user wiring, type S

Cable track for user wiring, type M

Standard specification/ sideway specification

Standard specification/ sideway specification

Drive method

Positioning repeatability

Guide

Permissible load moment

Overhang load length

Base

Applicable controller

Cable length (Note 3)

Ambient operating temperature

Linear servo motor

±0.005mm

Built-in linear guide

Ma: 57.4N • m Mb: 81.9 • m Mc: 60.8N • m

300 mm or less in Ma direction / 300 mm or less in Mb/Mc directions

Material: Aluminum with white alumite treatment

T2: SCON, SSEL, XSEL-P/Q

N: No Cable S: 3m M: 5m X□□: Specified length

0 to 40°C, 85% RH or below (non-condensing)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions

Caution

(Note 1) The maximum speed may not be attained if the stroke is short.

(Note 2) The maximum acceleration varies depending on the operating

conditions.

(Note 3) The maximum cable length is 20 m for the SCON/SSEL and 30 m

for the XSEL. Specify a desired length in units of meters.

(Example: X08 = 8 m)

適応コントローラ仕様Applicable Controller Specifications Applicable controller

Maximum controlled

axesOperating method

Power-supply voltage

Reference page

XSEL

SSEL

SCON

6 axes

2 axes

1 axis

Program

Program/positioner

Pulse train/positioner

Single-phase/ three-phase AC 200 V

Single-phase AC100/200VSingle-phase AC100/200V

→P53

→P52

→P51

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

AAAA-BBBB 30

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

LSA-S10SM

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

HomeME (*1) ME

54 31

70

100 (D)20 (B) 20

100

84

L (st+550)

(55) 5

90 160 stst 90

(55)5

195

914

100

93

120119

81

111106

44

160

1010

258550 25

±0.0265

845

4

5.8

3.3

2.75.5

1.8

97 70

+0.

01

0

2415

14 19 1914

4049

PA × 150

C – M5, depth 10 2 – slot, depth 5 (G)

2 – φ4H7, reamed depth 5

Cable track for user wiring (type S)

Cable track for user wiring (type M)

Detail view of G

Detail view of F

M3 T-slot (F)

Home

80(Re

amer

pitch

: ±0.0

2)

4 – M6, depth 102 – φ6H7, depth 10

50(Minimumdistancebetweensliders)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

Stroke

LABCD

Weight (kg)

60

6101

2248

324

14.5

150

70021412414

15.4

240

7902

10412504

16.2

330

8802

19412594

17.0

420

9702

28412684

17.9

510

106037416774

18.7

600

11503

16416864

19.6

690

12403

25416954

20.4

780

133044420

1044

21.2

870

14204

13420

1134

22.1

960

15104

22420

1224

22.9

1050

16005

1424

1314

23.7

1140

16905

10424

1404

24.6

1230

17805

19424

1494

25.4

1320

18705

28424

1584

26.2

1410

19606

7428

1674

27.1

1500

20506

16428

1764

27.9

1590

21406

25428

1854

28.7

1680

22307

4432

1944

29.6

1770

23207

13432

2034

30.4

1860

24107

22432

2124

31.2

Dimensions – Sideway Specification

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

31 AAAA-BBBB

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eFlat typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

LSA-S10HS

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e Flat typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

StrokeLABCDE

904751448

1441989.2

1805651

1348

23424810.0

2706551

2248

32429810.9

3607452141241434811.7

4508352

1041250439812.5

5409252

1941259444813.4

6301015

22841268447314.2

7201105

37416

77452315.0

8101195

316416

86457315.9

9001285

325416

95462316.7

9901375

44420

104467317.6

10801465

413420

113469818.4

11701555

422420

122474819.2

12601645

51424

131479820.1

13501735

510424

140484820.9

14401825

519424

149489821.7

15301915

528424

158492322.6

16202005

67428

167497323.4

17102095

616428

1764102324.2

18002185

625428

1854107325.1

18902275

74432

1944112325.9

19802365

713432

2034114826.7

20702455

722432

2124119827.6

5

0+0.

012

4

2.7 1.85.5

Reference surface

3.3

5.8

10060160

112

011

9

18585 100

1914

1524

4940

14 19

M3 T-slot (F)

Cable

70

100(D)10042.5 (B) 42.5

ME SE Home ME

L (st+385)

(55)112.5 st 160 112.5

(55)5 5

E165216

75

25 255085

65±0.02

615

621

97 70

16.510

10

44

111

106

93

120

117

3532

100

Cable track for user wiring (type S) Cable track for user wiring (type M)

Detail view of G

Detail view of F

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

PA × 150PA × 15080

(Ream

er pit

ch: ±

0.02)

4 – M6, depth 10

4 – M3, depth 5

2 – φ6H7, depth 10

C – M5, depth 10 2 – slot,

depth 5 (G)

2 – φ4H7, reamed depth 5

Shaft type, 100 mm wideHigh-thrust type, single-slider

LSA S10HS I 200 T2

I: Incremental

specification

N: NoneS: 3mM: 5mX□□:

T2 : SCONSSELXSEL-P/-Q

Refer to the options

table below.

90:90mm

2070:2070mm

200 : 200W

* Refer to P. 13 for details on each item comprising the model name.

Type

■ Model Name

Series Encoder type Applicable drive output

Stroke Applicable controller

Cable length Options

LSA-S10HS

Model Specifications

Options Common Specifications

Model

LSA-S10HS-I-200- ① -T2- ② - ③

Encoder type

I: Incremental

Applicable drive output (per slider)

200

Stroke Specified in

90-mm steps (mm)

90~2070

Speed (Note 1) (mm/sec)

Payload (Note 2)

Horizontal (kg)

Vertical (kg)

Maximum thrust (N)

2500 20 − 320

Maximum acceleration (G) (Note 2)

3

Rated thrust (N)

80

* In the above model names, ① indicates the stroke, ② indicates the cable length, and ③ indicates the options.

Name

CT2~6

US1~6

UM1~6

→P14

→P14

→P14

Model Reference page Remarks

Cable track installation direction

Cable track for user wiring, type S

Cable track for user wiring, type M

Installation directions 2 to 6

Installation directions 1 to 6

Installation directions 1 to 6

Drive method

Positioning repeatability

Guide

Permissible load moment

Overhang load length

Base

Applicable controller

Cable length (Note 3)

Ambient operating temperature

Linear servo motor

±0.005mm

Built-in linear guide

Ma: 57.4N • m Mb: 81.9 • m Mc: 60.8N • m

300 mm or less in Ma direction / 300 mm or less in Mb/Mc directions

Material: Aluminum with white alumite treatment

T2: SCON, SSEL, XSEL-P/Q

N: No Cable S: 3m M: 5m X□□: Specified length

0 to 40°C, 85% RH or below (non-condensing)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions

Caution

(Note 1) The maximum speed may not be attained if the stroke is short.

(Note 2) The maximum acceleration varies depending on the operating

conditions.

(Note 3) The maximum cable length is 20 m for the SCON/SSEL and 30 m

for the XSEL. Specify a desired length in units of meters.

(Example: X08 = 8 m)

適応コントローラ仕様Applicable Controller Specifications Applicable controller

Maximum controlled

axesOperating method

Power-supply voltage

Reference page

XSEL

SSEL

SCON

6 axes

2 axes

1 axis

Program

Program/positioner

Pulse train/positioner

Single-phase/ three-phase AC 200 V

Single-phase AC100/200VSingle-phase AC100/200V

→P53

→P52

→P51

Weight(kg)

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

AAAA-BBBB 32

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

LSA-S10HS

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

StrokeLABCD

Weight(kg)

90475

1448

144

9.7

180565

1134

8234

10.5

270655

1224

8324

11.4

360745

21412414

12.2

450835

210412504

13.0

540925

219412594

13.9

6301015

228412684

14.7

7201105

37416774

15.5

8101195

316416864

16.4

9001285

325416954

17.2

9901375

44420

1044

18.1

10801465

413420

1134

18.9

11701555

422420

1224

19.7

12601645

51424

1314

20.6

13501735

510424

1404

21.4

14401825

519424

1494

22.2

15301915

528424

1584

23.1

16202005

67428

1674

23.9

17102095

616428

1764

24.7

18002185

625428

1854

25.6

18902275

74432

1944

26.4

19802365

713432

2034

27.2

20702455

722432

2124

28.1

70

100 10042.542.5

(D)(B)

L (st+385)

(55)

112.5 112.5

(55)

Cable

ME160

5

st

5ME (*1)

1010

258550 25

±0.0265

SE

84

3154

195

914

100

93

120119

81

111106

44

5

4

5.52.71.8

5.8

3.3

97 70

+0.

012

0

2415

14 19 1914

4049

Cable track for user wiring (type S)

Cable track for user wiring (type M)

Detail view of G

Detail view of F

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

PA × 150 PA × 150

C – M5, depth 10 2 – slot, depth 5 (G)

2 – φ4H7, reamed depth 5

Home

80(R

eam

er p

itch:

±0.

02)

4 – M6, depth 102 – φ6H7, depth 10

M3 T-slot (F)

ME160

5

st

5ME (*1) Home

1010

258550 25

±0.0265

SE

70

100(B)42.5 PA × 150

(D) 10042.5

(55)

112.5 112.5

(55)

L (st+385)

195

914

100

93

120119

81

111106

44

31 54

845

4

5.8

3.3

2.75.5

1.8

9770

+0.

012

0

2415

14 19 1914

4049

Cable track for user wiring (type S)

Cable track for user wiring (type M)

Detail view of G

Detail view of F

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

M3 T-slot (F)

80(R

eam

er p

itch:

±0.

02)

4 – M6, depth 102 – φ6H7, depth 10

Cable

C – M5, depth 102 – slot, depth 5 (G)

2 – φ4H7, reamed depth 5

PA × 150

StrokeLABCD

Weight(kg)

90475

1448

144

9.7

180565

1134

8234

10.5

270655

1224

8324

11.4

360745

21412414

12.2

450835

210412504

13.0

540925

219412594

13.9

6301015

228412684

14.7

7201105

37416774

15.5

8101195

316416864

16.4

9001285

325416954

17.2

9901375

44420

1044

18.1

10801465

413420

1134

18.9

11701555

422420

1224

19.7

12601645

51424

1314

20.6

13501735

510424

1404

21.4

14401825

519424

1494

22.2

15301915

528424

1584

23.1

16202005

67428

1674

23.9

17102095

616428

1764

24.7

18002185

625428

1854

25.6

18902275

74432

1944

26.4

19802365

713432

2034

27.2

20702455

722432

2124

28.1

Dimensions – Sideway Specification (Standard)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions – Sideway Specification (Cable Track, Opposite)

You can download CAD

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

33 AAAA-BBBB

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eFlat typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

LSA-S10HM

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e Flat typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

StrokeLABCD

Weight(kg)

PA × 150 PA × 150

5

0+0.

012

4

2.7 1.85.5

Reference surface

stst160

ME Home Home ME

L (st+640)

(55)112.5

160 112.5

(55)5 5

615

621

16.5

9710

7010

16521675

25 2550

8565±0.02

3.3

5.8

M3 T-slot (F)

C – M5, depth 10 2 – slot,

depth 5 (G)

2 – φ4H7, reamed depth 5

95 (Minimum distance between sliders)

4 – M3, depth 5

80(Re

amer

pitch

: ±0.0

2)

4 – M6, depth 102 – φ6H7, depth 10

70

100(D)10042.5 (B) 42.5

44

111

106

93

120

117

3532

100

10060160

112

011

9

18585 100

1914

1524

4940

14 19

Cable track for user wiring (type S) Cable track for user wiring (type M)

Detail view of G

Detail view of F

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

Shaft type, 100 mm wideHigh-thrust type, multi-slider

10574521412

414

15.6

1958352

10412504

16.4

2859252

19412594

17.3

3751015

228412684

18.1

4651105

37416

774

18.9

5551195

316416

864

19.8

6451285

325416

954

20.6

7351375

44420

1044

21.4

8251465

413420

1134

22.3

9151555

422420

1224

23.1

10051645

51424

1314

23.9

10951735

510424

1404

24.8

11851825

519424

1494

25.6

12751915

528424

1584

26.4

13652005

67428

1674

27.3

14552095

616428

1764

28.1

15452185

625428

1854

28.9

16352275

74432

1944

29.8

17252365

713432

2034

30.6

18152455

722432

2124

31.4

LSA S10HM I 200 T2

I: Incremental

specification

N: NoneS: 3mM: 5mX□□:

T2 : SCONSSELXSEL-P/-Q

Refer to the options

table below.

105:105mm

1815:1815mm

200 : 200W

* Refer to P. 13 for details on each item comprising the model name.

Type

■ Model Name

Series Encoder type Applicable drive output

Stroke Applicable controller

Cable length Options

LSA-S10HM

Model Specifications

Common Specifications

Note) To change the cable track position to the opposite side, install the actuator by rotating it 180 degrees horizontally because the actuator is bilaterally symmetrical.

Model Encoder type

I: Incremental

Applicable drive output (per slider)

200

Stroke Specified in

90-mm steps (mm)

105~1815

Speed (Note 1) (mm/sec)

Payload (Note 2)

Horizontal (kg)

Vertical (kg)

Maximum thrust (N)

2500 20 − 320

Maximum acceleration (G) (Note 2)

3

Rated thrust (N)

80

* In the above model names, ① indicates the stroke, ② indicates the cable length, and ③ indicates the options.

Options

Name

CT5

US1/US5

UM1/UM5

→P14

→P14

→P14

Sideway specification

Model Reference page Remarks

LSA-S10HM-I-200- ① -T2- ② - ③

Cable track installation direction

Cable track for user wiring, type S

Cable track for user wiring, type M

Standard specification/ sideway specification

Standard specification/ sideway specification

Drive method

Positioning repeatability

Guide

Permissible load moment

Overhang load length

Base

Applicable controller

Cable length (Note 3)

Ambient operating temperature

Linear servo motor

±0.005mm

Built-in linear guide

Ma: 57.4N • m Mb: 81.9 • m Mc: 60.8N • m

300 mm or less in Ma direction / 300 mm or less in Mb/Mc directions

Material: Aluminum with white alumite treatment

T2: SCON, SSEL, XSEL-P/Q

N: No Cable S: 3m M: 5m X□□: Specified length

0 to 40°C, 85% RH or below (non-condensing)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions

Caution

(Note 1) The maximum speed may not be attained if the stroke is short.

(Note 2) The maximum acceleration varies depending on the operating

conditions.

(Note 3) The maximum cable length is 20 m for the SCON/SSEL and 30 m

for the XSEL. Specify a desired length in units of meters.

(Example: X08 = 8 m)

適応コントローラ仕様Applicable Controller Specifications Applicable controller

Maximum controlled

axesOperating method

Power-supply voltage

Reference page

XSEL

SSEL

SCON

6 axes

2 axes

1 axis

Program

Program/positioner

Pulse train/positioner

Single-phase/ three-phase AC 200 V

Single-phase AC100/200VSingle-phase AC100/200V

→P53

→P52

→P51

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

AAAA-BBBB 34

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

LSA-S10HM

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

70

100 10042.542.5

(D)(B)

L (st+640)

112.5

55

112.5

(55)

stst

HomeME (*1) ME (*1)

54 31

84

5

160

5

195

914

100

93

120119

81

111106

44

160

1010

258550 25

±0.0265

845

4

5.8

3.3

2.75.5

1.8

97 70

+0.

012

0

2415

14 19 1914

4049

Cable track for user wiring (type S)

Cable track for user wiring (type M)

Detail view of G

Detail view of F

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

PA × 150PA × 150

95(Minimum distance

between sliders)

4 – M6, depth 102 – φ6H7, depth 10

Home

80(R

eam

er p

itch:

±0.

02)

C – M5, depth 10 2 – slot, depth 5 (G)

2 – φ4H7, reamed depth 5

M3 T-slot (F)

Stroke

LABCD

Weight (kg)

105

74521412414

16.6

195

8352

10412504

17.4

285

9252

19412594

18.3

375

10152

28412684

19.1

465

110537416774

19.9

555

11953

16416864

20.8

645

12853

25416954

21.6

735

137544420

1044

22.4

825

14654

13420

1134

23.3

915

15554

22420

1224

24.1

1005

16455

1424

1314

24.9

1095

17355

10424

1404

25.8

1185

18255

19424

1494

26.6

1275

19155

28424

1584

27.4

1365

20056

7428

1674

28.3

1455

20956

16428

1764

29.1

1545

21856

25428

1854

29.9

1635

22757

4432

1944

30.8

1725

23657

13432

2034

31.6

1815

24557

22432

2124

32.4

Dimensions – Sideway Specification

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

35 AAAA-BBBB

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eFlat typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

LSA-H8SS

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eFlat typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

ME

SE

ME

Home(34) (34)

L (st+256)

1048 st 160

1048

80 D 80

50

A

E(max27)

6

7516 52 16

16.5

15 621

802550

60

25

75

852

8

Reference surface

72

(95)

86100

97

3135 80

23

5.5 2.7

1.8

5.8

3.3

±0.0265

8060140

19910

0

16585 80

1914

1524

4940

14 19

Cable track for user wiring (type S) Cable track for user wiring (type M)

Detail view of F

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

M3 T-slot (F)

Cable

PB × 100

4 – M5, depth 10

4 – M3, depth 5

(Ream

er pit

ch: ±

0.02)

2 – φ4H7, depth 8

C – M5, depth 10

4 – φ4H7, depth 5

Small type, 80 mm wideStandard type, single-slider

StrokeLABCDE

50306532640130

5.0

1504065338

140180

6.2

25050653410240230

7.4

35060653512340280

8.6

45070653614440330

9.8

550806537

16540380

11.0

650906538

18640430

12.2

7501006539

20740480

13.4

8501106531022

840530

14.6

9501206531124

940580

15.8

10501306531226

1040630

17.0

11501406531328

1140680

18.2

12501506531430

1240730

19.4

13501606531532

1340780

20.6

14501706531634

1440830

21.8

15501806531736

1540880

23.0

16501906531838

1640930

24.2

LSA H8SS I 200 T2

I: Incremental

specification

N: NoneS: 3mM: 5mX□□:

T2 : SCONSSELXSEL-P/-Q

Refer to the options

table below.

50:50mm

1650:1650mm

200 : 200W

* Refer to P. 13 for details on each item comprising the model name.

Type

■ Model Name

Series Encoder type Applicable drive output

Stroke Applicable controller

Cable length Options

LSA-H8SS

Model Specifications

Model Encoder type

I: Incremental

Applicable drive output (per slider)

200

Stroke Specified in

100-mm steps (mm)

50~1650

Speed (Note 1) (mm/sec)

Payload (Note 2)

Horizontal (kg)

Vertical (kg)

Maximum thrust (N)

2500 5 − 90

Maximum acceleration (G) (Note 2)

3

Rated thrust (N)

30

* In the above model names, ① indicates the stroke, ② indicates the cable length, and ③ indicates the options.

Options

Name

CT2~6

US1~6

UM1~6

→P14

→P14

→P14

Model Reference page Remarks

LSA-H8SS-I-200- ① -T2- ② - ③

Cable track installation direction

Cable track for user wiring, type S

Cable track for user wiring, type M

Common Specifications

Installation directions 2 to 6

Installation directions 1 to 6

Installation directions 1 to 6

Drive method

Positioning repeatability

Guide

Permissible load moment

Overhang load length

Base

Applicable controller

Cable length (Note 3)

Ambient operating temperature

Linear servo motor

±0.005mm

Built-in linear guide

Ma: 8.65N • m Mb: 8.65 • m Mc: 8.65N • m

300 mm or less in Ma direction / 300 mm or less in Mb/Mc directions

Material: Aluminum with white alumite treatment

T2: SCON, SSEL, XSEL-P/Q

N: No Cable S: 3m M: 5m X□□: Specified length

0 to 40°C, 85% RH or below (non-condensing)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions

Caution

(Note 1) The maximum speed may not be attained if the stroke is short.

(Note 2) The maximum acceleration varies depending on the operating

conditions.

(Note 3) The maximum cable length is 20 m for the SCON/SSEL and 30 m

for the XSEL. Specify a desired length in units of meters.

(Example: X08 = 8 m)

適応コントローラ仕様Applicable Controller Specifications Applicable controller

Maximum controlled

axesOperating method

Power-supply voltage

Reference page

XSEL

SSEL

SCON

6 axes

2 axes

1 axis

Program

Program/positioner

Pulse train/positioner

Single-phase/ three-phase AC 200 V

Single-phase AC100/200VSingle-phase AC100/200V

→P53

→P52

→P51

Weight(kg)

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

AAAA-BBBB 36

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

LSA-H8SS

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

ME SE Home ME (*1)

1134

10099

61

175

914

8072

MAX:27 L (st+256)

(34) (34)

4848

10 10

st 160

80

5.52.7 1.8

5.8

3.3

23

D 80

50

A

75

(95)

852

8

±0.026580

25 50 2586

84

2415

14 19 1914

4049

Cable track for user wiring (type S)

Cable track for user wiring (type M)

Detail view of F

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

Cable

C – M5, depth 104 – φ4H7, depth 5

PB × 100

M3 T-slot (F)

4 – M5, depth 10

60(Re

amer

pitch

: ±0.0

2)

2 – φ4H7, depth 8

StrokeLABCD

Weight(kg)

503065326405.5

1504065338

1406.7

250506534102407.9

350606535123409.1

4507065361444010.3

5508065371654011.5

6509065381864012.7

7501006

539

2074013.9

8501106

531022

84015.1

9501206

531124

94016.3

10501306

531226

104017.5

11501406

531328

114018.7

12501506

531430

124019.9

13501606

531532

134021.1

14501706

531634

144022.3

15501806

531736

154023.5

16501906

531838

164024.7

11 34

10099

61

175

914

80 72

160 st

10 10

4848

(34) (34)

L (st+256) MAX:27

80

23

D 80

50

A

75

(95)

852

8

±0.026580

25 50 2586

Home MESEME (*1)

845.52.7 1.8

5.8

3.3

2415

14 19 1914

4049

Cable track for user wiring (type S)

Cable track for user wiring (type M)

Detail view of F

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

M3 T-slot (F)

60(Re

amer

pitch

: ±0.0

2)

4 – M5, depth 102 – φ4H7, depth 8

C – M5, depth 10

Cable

4 – φ4H7, depth 5

PB × 100

StrokeLABCD

Weight(kg)

503065326405.5

1504065338

1406.7

250506534102407.9

350606535123409.1

4507065361444010.3

5508065371654011.5

6509065381864012.7

7501006

539

2074013.9

8501106

531022

84015.1

9501206

531124

94016.3

10501306

531226

104017.5

11501406

531328

114018.7

12501506

531430

124019.9

13501606

531532

134021.1

14501706

531634

144022.3

15501806

531736

154023.5

16501906

531838

164024.7

Dimensions – Sideway Specification (Standard)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions – Sideway Specification (Cable Track, Opposite)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

37 AAAA-BBBB

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eFlat typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

LSA-H8SM

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eFlat typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

StrokeLABCDE

Weight(kg)

1306065351234018010.7

2307065361444023011.9

330806537

1654028013.1

430906538

1864033014.3

5301006539

2074038015.5

6301106531022

84043016.7

7301206531124

94048017.9

8301306531226

104053019.1

9301406531328

114058020.3

10301506531430

124063021.5

11301606531532

134068022.7

12301706531634

144073023.9

13301806531736

154078025.1

14301906531838

164083026.3

5.5 2.7

1.8

5.8

3.3

72

(95)

86100

97

3135 80

23

max22)

±0.026580

7516 52 16

2525 5016

.5

615 6

6021

(max22)

Home ME

ME st1048160

st

Home(34) (34)

L (st+476)

1048 160

80 D 80A

50

75

852

8

E E

Reference surface

8060140

19910

0

16585 80

1914

1524

4940

14 19

Cable track for user wiring (type S) Cable track for user wiring (type M)

Detail view of F

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

PB × 100C – M5, depth 10

4 – φ4H7, depth 5

60 (Minimum distance between sliders)

4 – M5, depth 10

4 – M3, depth 5

(Ream

er pit

ch: ±

0.02)

2 – φ4H7, depth 8

Small type, 80 mm wideStandard type, multi-slider

LSA H8SM I 200 T2

I: Incremental

specification

N: NoneS: 3mM: 5mX□□:

T2 : SCONSSELXSEL-P/-Q

Refer to the options

table below.

130:130mm

1430:1430mm

200 : 200W

* Refer to P. 13 for details on each item comprising the model name.

Type

■ Model Name

Series Encoder type Applicable drive output

Stroke Applicable controller

Cable length Options

Caution

(Note 1) The maximum speed may not be attained if the stroke is short.

(Note 2) The maximum acceleration varies depending on the operating

conditions.

(Note 3) The maximum cable length is 20 m for the SCON/SSEL and 30 m

for the XSEL. Specify a desired length in units of meters.

(Example: X08 = 8 m)

適応コントローラ仕様Applicable Controller Specifications Applicable controller

Maximum controlled

axesOperating method

Power-supply voltage

Reference page

XSEL

SSEL

SCON

6 axes

2 axes

1 axis

Program

Program/positioner

Pulse train/positioner

Single-phase/ three-phase AC 200 V

Single-phase AC100/200VSingle-phase AC100/200V

→P53

→P52

→P51

LSA-H8SM

Model Specifications

Common Specifications

Note) To change the cable track position to the opposite side, install the actuator by rotating it 180 degrees horizontally because the actuator is bilaterally symmetrical.

Model Encoder type

I: Incremental

Applicable drive output (per slider)

200

Stroke Specified in

100-mm steps (mm)

130~1430

Speed (Note 1) (mm/sec)

Payload (Note 2)

Horizontal (kg)

Vertical (kg)

Maximum thrust (N)

2500 5 − 90

Maximum acceleration (G) (Note 2)

3

Rated thrust (N)

30

* In the above model names, ① indicates the stroke, ② indicates the cable length, and ③ indicates the options.

Options

Name

CT5

US1/US5

UM1/UM5

→P14

→P14

→P14

Sideway specification

Model Reference page Remarks

LSA-H8SM-I-200- ① -T2- ② - ③

Cable track installation direction

Cable track for user wiring, type S

Cable track for user wiring, type M

Standard specification/ sideway specification

Standard specification/ sideway specification

Drive method

Positioning repeatability

Guide

Permissible load moment

Overhang load length

Base

Applicable controller

Cable length (Note 3)

Ambient operating temperature

Linear servo motor

±0.005mm

Built-in linear guide

Ma: 8.65N • m Mb: 8.65 • m Mc: 8.65N • m

300 mm or less in Ma direction / 300 mm or less in Mb/Mc directions

Material: Aluminum with white alumite treatment

T2: SCON, SSEL, XSEL-P/Q

N: No Cable S: 3m M: 5m X□□: Specified length

0 to 40°C, 85% RH or below (non-condensing)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

AAAA-BBBB 38

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

LSA-S8SM

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

Stroke

LABCD

Weight (kg)

130

60653512340

11.7

230

70653614440

12.9

330

80653716540

14.1

430

90653818640

15.3

530

100653920740

16.5

630

1106531022840

17.7

730

1206531124

940

18.9

830

1306531226

1040

20.1

930

1406531328

1140

21.3

1030

1506531430

1240

22.5

1130

1606531532

1340

23.7

1230

1706531634

1440

24.9

1330

1806531736

1540

26.1

1430

1906531838

1640

27.3

MAX:22MAX:22

stst

160

84

1134

10099

61

175

914

8072

160

1010

4848

(34)(34)

L (st+476)

80

5.52.7 1.8

5.8

3.3

23

D 80

50

A

75

(95)

852

8

±0.026580

25 50 2586

HomeME (*1) Home ME (*1)

84

2415

14 19 1914

4049

Cable track for user wiring (type S)

Cable track for user wiring (type M)

Detail view of F

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

PB × 100

C – M5, depth 104 – φ4H7, depth 5

M3 T-slot (F)

4 – M5, depth 10

60(Re

amer

pitch

: ±0.0

2)

2 – φ4H7, depth 8

60(Minimumdistancebetweensliders)

Dimensions – Sideway Specification

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

39 AAAA-BBBB

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eFlat typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

LSA-H8HS

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eFlat typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

StrokeLABCDE

Weight (kg)

504065338

1401806.5

150506534102402307.7

250606535123402808.9

3507065361444033010.1

45080653716

54038011.3

55090653818

64043012.5

6501006539

2074048013.7

7501106531022

84053014.9

8501206531124

94058016.1

9501306531226

104063017.3

10501406531328

114068018.5

11501506531430

124073019.7

12501606531532

134078020.9

13501706531634

144083022.1

14501806531736

154088023.3

15501906531838

164093024.5

8060140

19910

0

16585 80

1914

1524

4940

14 19

23

72

(95)

86100

97

3135 80

E

8

±0.026580

7516 52 16

2525 50

16.5

615 621

75

852 60

ME SE MEHome(34) (34)

L (st+356)

1098 st 160

1098

80 D 80A

50

5.5 2.7

1.8

5.8

3.3

Reference surface

Cable track for user wiring (type S) Cable track for user wiring (type M)

Detail view of F

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

PB × 100C – M5, depth 10

4 – φ4H7, depth 5

Cable 4 – M3, depth 5

4 – M5, depth 10

(Ream

er pit

ch: ±

0.02)

2 – φ4H7, depth 8

M3 T-slot (F)

Small type, 80 mm wideHigh-thrust type, single-slider

LSA H8HS I 200 T2

I: Incremental

specification

N: NoneS: 3mM: 5mX□□:

T2 : SCONSSELXSEL-P/-Q

Refer to the options

table below.

50:50mm

1550:1550mm

200 : 200W

* Refer to P. 13 for details on each item comprising the model name.

Type

■ Model Name

Series Encoder type Applicable drive output

Stroke Applicable controller

Cable length Options

LSA-H8HS

Model Specifications

Model Encoder type

I: Incremental

Applicable drive output (per slider)

200

Stroke Specified in

100-mm steps (mm)

50~1550

Speed (Note 1) (mm/sec)

Payload (Note 2)

Horizontal (kg)

Vertical (kg)

Maximum thrust (N)

2500 8 − 180

Maximum acceleration (G) (Note 2)

3

Rated thrust (N)

60

* In the above model names, ① indicates the stroke, ② indicates the cable length, and ③ indicates the options.

Options

Name

CT2~6

US1~6

UM1~6

→P14

→P14

→P14

Model Reference page Remarks

LSA-H8HS-I-200- ① -T2- ② - ③

Cable track installation direction

Cable track for user wiring, type S

Cable track for user wiring, type M

Common Specifications

Installation directions 2 to 6

Installation directions 1 to 6

Installation directions 1 to 6

Drive method

Positioning repeatability

Guide

Permissible load moment

Overhang load length

Base

Applicable controller

Cable length (Note 3)

Ambient operating temperature

Linear servo motor

±0.005mm

Built-in linear guide

Ma: 8.65N • m Mb: 8.65 • m Mc: 8.65N • m

300 mm or less in Ma direction / 300 mm or less in Mb/Mc directions

Material: Aluminum with white alumite treatment

T2: SCON, SSEL, XSEL-P/Q

N: No Cable S: 3m M: 5m X□□: Specified length

0 to 40°C, 85% RH or below (non-condensing)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions

Caution

(Note 1) The maximum speed may not be attained if the stroke is short.

(Note 2) The maximum acceleration varies depending on the operating

conditions.

(Note 3) The maximum cable length is 20 m for the SCON/SSEL and 30 m

for the XSEL. Specify a desired length in units of meters.

(Example: X08 = 8 m)

適応コントローラ仕様Applicable Controller Specifications Applicable controller

Maximum controlled

axesOperating method

Power-supply voltage

Reference page

XSEL

SSEL

SCON

6 axes

2 axes

1 axis

Program

Program/positioner

Pulse train/positioner

Single-phase/ three-phase AC 200 V

Single-phase AC100/200VSingle-phase AC100/200V

→P53

→P52

→P51

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

AAAA-BBBB 40

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

LSA-H8HS

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

StrokeLABCD

504065338

140

7.0

15050653410240

8.2

25060653512340

9.4

35070653614440

10.6

45080653716540

11.8

55090653818640

13.0

6501006

53920740

14.2

7501106

531022

840

15.4

8501206

531124

940

16.6

9501306

531226

1040

17.8

10501406

531328

1140

19.0

11501506

531430

1240

20.2

12501606

531532

1340

21.4

13501706

531634

1440

22.6

14501806

531736

1540

23.8

15501906

531838

1640

25.0

88

ME SE Home ME (*1)

1134

10099

61

175

914

8072

L (st+356)

(34) (34)

9898

10 10

st 160

80

5.52.7 1.8

5.8

3.3

23

D 80

50

A

75

(95)

M3 T-slot (F)

852

8

±0.026580

25 50 2586

84

2415

14 19 19144049

PB × 100

Cable

C – M5, depth 104 – φ4H7, depth 5

Cable track for user wiring (type S)

Cable track for user wiring (type M)

Detail view of F

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

60(Re

amer

pitch

: ±0.0

2)

4 – M5, depth 102 – φ4H7, depth 8

11 34

10099

61

175

914

80 72

160 st

10 10

9898

(34) (34)

L (st+356)

80

23

D 80

50

A

75

(95)

852

8

±0.026580

25 50 2586

Home MESEME (*1)

84

5.52.7 1.8

5.8

3.3

2415

14 19 1914

4049

Cable track for user wiring (type S)

Cable track for user wiring (type M)

Detail view of F

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

M3 T-slot (F)

4 – M5, depth 10

60(Re

amer

pitch

: ±0.0

2)

2 – φ4H7, depth 8

Cable

PB × 100

C – M5, depth 10

4 – φ4H7, depth 5

LABCD

Weight(kg)

504065338

1407.0

150506534102408.2

250606535123409.4

3507065361444010.6

4508065371654011.8

5509065381864013.0

6501006

5392074014.2

7501106

531022

84015.4

8501206

531124

94016.6

9501306

531226

104017.8

10501406

531328

114019.0

11501506

531430

124020.2

12501606

531532

134021.4

13501706

531634

144022.6

14501806

531736

154023.8

15501906

531838

164025.0

Dimensions – Sideway Specification (Standard)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions – Sideway Specification (Cable Track, Opposite)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Weight(kg)

Stroke

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

41 AAAA-BBBB

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eFlat typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

LSA-H8HM

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eFlat typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

StrokeLABCDE

130806537

16540180

13.8

23090653818640230

15.0

330100653920740280

16.2

4301106531022840330

17.4

5301206531124

940380

18.6

6301306531226

1040430

19.8

7301406531328

1140480

21.0

8301506531430

1240530

22.2

9301606531532

1340580

23.4

10301706531634

1440630

24.6

11301806531736

1540680

25.8

12301906531838

1640730

27.0

MEME

st10

98160st

80 D 80

50

A

Home

75

(34)(34)

L (st+676)

1098 160

615 6

852

8

±0.026580

7516 52 16

2525 50

21 16

.560

E E

PB × 100

160 (Minimum distance between sliders)

4 – M3, depth 5

4 – M5, depth 102 – φ4H7, depth 8

(Ream

er pit

ch: ±

0.02)

Home

C – M5, depth 10

4 – φ4H7, depth 5

23

72

(95)

86100

97

3135 80

5.5 2.7

1.8

5.8

3.3

M3 T-slot (F)

Reference surface

8060140

19910

0

16585 80

1914

1524

4940

14 19

Cable track for user wiring (type S) Cable track for user wiring (type M)

Detail view of F

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

Small type, 80 mm wideHigh-thrust type, multi-slider

LSA H8HM I 200 T2

I: Incremental

specification

N: NoneS: 3mM: 5mX□□:

T2 : SCONSSELXSEL-P/-Q

Refer to the options

table below.

130:130mm

1230:1230mm

200 : 200W

* Refer to P. 13 for details on each item comprising the model name.

Type

■ Model Name

Series Encoder type Applicable drive output

Stroke Applicable controller

Cable length Options

LSA-H8HM

Model Specifications

Common Specifications

Note) To change the cable track position to the opposite side, install the actuator by rotating it 180 degrees horizontally because the actuator is bilaterally symmetrical.

Model Encoder type

I: Incremental

Applicable drive output (per slider)

200

Stroke Specified in

100-mm steps (mm)

130~1230

Speed (Note 1) (mm/sec)

Payload (Note 2)

Horizontal (kg)

Vertical (kg)

Maximum thrust (N)

2500 8 − 180

Maximum acceleration (G) (Note 2)

3

Rated thrust (N)

60

* In the above model names, ① indicates the stroke, ② indicates the cable length, and ③ indicates the options.

Options

Name

CT5

US1/US5

UM1/UM5

→P14

→P14

→P14

Sideway specification

Model Reference page Remarks

LSA-H8HM-I-200- ① -T2- ② - ③

Cable track installation direction

Cable track for user wiring, type S

Cable track for user wiring, type M

Standard specification/ sideway specification

Standard specification/ sideway specification

Drive method

Positioning repeatability

Guide

Permissible load moment

Overhang load length

Base

Applicable controller

Cable length (Note 3)

Ambient operating temperature

Linear servo motor

±0.005mm

Built-in linear guide

Ma: 8.65N • m Mb: 8.65• m Mc: 8.65N • m

300 mm or less in Ma direction / 300 mm or less in Mb/Mc directions

Material: Aluminum with white alumite treatment

T2: SCON, SSEL, XSEL-P/Q

N: No Cable S: 3m M: 5m X□□: Specified length

0 to 40°C, 85% RH or below (non-condensing)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions

Caution

(Note 1) The maximum speed may not be attained if the stroke is short.

(Note 2) The maximum acceleration varies depending on the operating

conditions.

(Note 3) The maximum cable length is 20 m for the SCON/SSEL and 30 m

for the XSEL. Specify a desired length in units of meters.

(Example: X08 = 8 m)

適応コントローラ仕様Applicable Controller Specifications Applicable controller

Maximum controlled

axesOperating method

Power-supply voltage

Reference page

XSEL

SSEL

SCON

6 axes

2 axes

1 axis

Program

Program/positioner

Pulse train/positioner

Single-phase/ three-phase AC 200 V

Single-phase AC100/200VSingle-phase AC100/200V

→P53

→P52

→P51

Weight(kg)

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

AAAA-BBBB 42

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

LSA-H8HM 

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

Stroke

LABCD

Weight (kg)

130

80653716540

14.8

230

90653818640

16.0

330

100653920740

17.2

430

1106531022840

18.4

530

1206531124940

19.6

630

1306531226

1040

20.8

730

1406531328

1140

22.0

830

1506531430

1240

23.2

930

1606531532

1340

24.4

1030

1706531634

1440

25.6

1130

1806531736

1540

26.8

1230

1906531838

1640

28.0

stst

160

84

1134

10099

61

175

914

8072

160

1010

9898

(34)(34)

L (st+676)

80

2.75.5

1.8

5.8

3.3

23

M3 T-slot (F)

D 80

50

P A

75

(95)

852

8

±0.026580

25 50 2586

ME (*1) Home ME (*1)

84

2415

14 19 1914

4049

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type S)

Cable track for user wiring Dimensions of section (type M)

160(Minimum distance

between sliders)

60(Re

amer

pitch

: ±0.0

2)

Home

4 – M5, depth 102 – φ4H7, depth 8

Cable track for user wiring (type S)

Cable track for user wiring (type M)

Detail view of F

C – M5, depth 10

4 – φ4H7, depth 5

Bx100

Dimensions – Wall-mounted Specification

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

43 AAAA-BBBB

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eFlat typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

LSA-L15SS

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e Flat typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

Options

Name

Cable track installation direction

CT2

CT3

CT4

→P14

→P14

→P14

Installation directions 2

Installation directions 3

Installation directions 4

Model Reference page Remarks

Cable

Cutout for T-nut insertion

Cutout for T-nut insertion

115

M5

93

179.8

17

C3C375

20.210.2

7.3

4.5 2

4.3

18.5

14331

85(*

1)

45

32 145

44.5

A59.5 80 80 59.5

145

115

B

175

L (st+240)

1532.5 st 175

1532.5

88

145

(max50)

8 – M5, depth 5, Helisert 22.522.52020 4545

ME SE

45

ME (*1)

105

(*1)The cable track may expand, in which case the above dimensions may be exceeded slightly.

Material: S10C or equivalent Surface treatment: Bright chromate conversion coating/plating Weight: Approx. 14 g/pcSupplied quantity: Refer to line C in the table below.

(Supplied T-nut)

Detail view of base mount

Reference surface

Detail view of D

M4 T-slot (D)

2 – φ4H7, depth 6

4 – φ4H7, depth 6

Home

Flat type, 145 mm wideStandard type, single-slider

StrokeLABC

Weight(kg)

150390111

179.58

6.5

250490211

229.510

7.9

350590311

279.512

9.3

450690411

329.514

10.6

550790511

379.516

12.0

650890611

429.518

13.4

750990711

479.520

14.8

8501090811

529.522

16.2

9501190911

579.524

17.5

105012901011629.5

26

18.9

115013901111679.5

28

20.3

125014901211729.5

30

21.7

135015901311779.5

32

23.1

145016901411829.5

34

24.4

155017901511879.5

36

25.8

165018901611929.5

38

27.2

LSA L15SS I 200 T2

I: Incremental

specification

N: NoneS: 3mM: 5mX□□:

T2 : SCONSSELXSEL-P/-Q

150:150mm

1650:1650mm

200 : 200W

* Refer to P. 13 for details on each item comprising the model name.

Type

■ Model Name

Series Encoder type Applicable drive output

Stroke Applicable controller

Cable length Options

LSA-L15SSCT2: Cable track

installation 2

CT3: Cable track

installation

Model Specifications

Model Encoder type

I: Incremental

Applicable drive output (per slider)

200

Stroke Specified in

100-mm steps (mm)

150~1650

Speed (Note 1) (mm/sec)

Payload (Note 2)

Horizontal (kg)

Vertical (kg)

Maximum thrust (N)

2500 5 − 90

Maximum acceleration (G) (Note 2)

3

Rated thrust (N)

30LSA-L15SS-I-200- ① -T2- ② - ③

Common Specifications

* In the above model names, ① indicates the stroke, ② indicates the cable length, and ③ indicates the options.

Drive method

Positioning repeatability

Guide

Permissible load moment

Overhang load length

Base

Applicable controller

Cable length (Note 3)

Ambient operating temperature

Linear servo motor

±0.005mm

Built-in linear guide

Ma: 24.2N • m Mb: 24.2 • m Mc: 24.2N • m

525 mm or less in Ma direction / 525 mm or less in Mb/Mc directions

Material: Aluminum with white alumite treatment

T2: SCON, SSEL, XSEL-P/Q

N: No Cable S: 3m M: 5m X□□: Specified length

0 to 40°C, 85% RH or below (non-condensing)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions

Caution

(Note 1) The maximum speed may not be attained if the stroke is short.

(Note 2) The maximum acceleration varies depending on the operating

conditions.

(Note 3) The maximum cable length is 20 m for the SCON/SSEL and 30 m

for the XSEL. Specify a desired length in units of meters.

(Example: X08 = 8 m)

適応コントローラ仕様Applicable Controller Specifications Applicable controller

Maximum controlled

axesOperating method

Power-supply voltage

Reference page

XSEL

SSEL

SCON

6 axes

2 axes

1 axis

Program

Program/positioner

Pulse train/positioner

Single-phase/ three-phase AC 200 V

Single-phase AC100/200VSingle-phase AC100/200V

→P53

→P52

→P51

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

AAAA-BBBB 44

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

LSA-L15SM 

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

st175st

(max:35)B(131)(max:35) B

Cutout for T-nut insertion

Cutout for T-nut insertion

115

M5

93

179.8

17

C3C375

20.210.2

7.3

4.5 2

4.3

18.5

M4 T-slot (D)

14331

85 (*

1)

45

32 145

44.5

A59.5 80 80 59.5

145

115

175

L (st+440)

1532.5

1751532.5

88

145

22.522.52020 4545

ME (*1)

45

ME (*1)

105

Detail view of base mount(5:1)

Home 25 (Minimum distance between sliders)

Home

(Ream

er pit

ch: ±

0.02)

CableCable

8 – M5, depth 5, Helisert

2 – φ4H7, depth 6

4 – φ4H7, depth 6

Detail view of D

(*1)The cable track may expand, in which case the above dimensions may be exceeded slightly.

Material: S10C or equivalent Surface treatment: Bright chromate conversion coating/plating Weight: Approx. 14 g/pcSupplied quantity: Refer to line C in the table below.

(Supplied T-nut)

Flat type, 145 mm wideStandard type, multi-slider

LABC

Weight(kg)

Stroke 50490211

179.510

10.0

150590311

229.512

11.4

250690411

279.514

12.8

350790511

329.516

14.2

450 550890611

379.518

15.6

650990711

429.520

17.0

7501090811

479.522

18.4

8501190911

529.524

19.8

95012901011579.5

26

21.2

105013901111629.5

28

22.6

115014901211679.5

30

24.0

125015901311729.5

32

25.4

135016901411779.5

34

26.8

145017901511829.5

36

28.3

18901611879.5

38

29.7

Options

Name Model

No options are available.

Reference page Remarks

The photograph shows a single-slider model.

LSA L15SM I 200 T2

I: Incremental

specification

N: NoneS: 3mM: 5mX□□:

T2 : SCONSSELXSEL-P/-Q

50:50mm

1450:1450mm

200 : 200W

* Refer to P. 13 for details on each item comprising the model name.

Type

■ Model Name

Series Encoder type Applicable drive output

Stroke Applicable controller

Cable length Options

LSA-L15SM

Model Specifications

Model Encoder type

I: Incremental

Applicable drive output (per slider)

200

Stroke Specified in

100-mm steps (mm)

50~1450

Speed (Note 1) (mm/sec)

Payload (Note 2)

Horizontal (kg)

Vertical (kg)

Maximum thrust (N)

2500 5 − 90

Maximum acceleration (G) (Note 2)

3

Rated thrust (N)

30LSA-L15SM-I-200- ① -T2- ② - ③

Common Specifications

* In the above model names, ① indicates the stroke, ② indicates the cable length, and ③ indicates the options.

Drive method

Positioning repeatability

Guide

Permissible load moment

Overhang load length

Base

Applicable controller

Cable length (Note 3)

Ambient operating temperature

Linear servo motor

±0.005mm

Built-in linear guide

Ma: 24.2N • m Mb: 24.2 • m Mc: 24.2N • m

525 mm or less in Ma direction / 525 mm or less in Mb/Mc directions

Material: Aluminum with white alumite treatment

T2: SCON, SSEL, XSEL-P/Q

N: No Cable S: 3m M: 5m X□□: Specified length

0 to 40°C, 85% RH or below (non-condensing)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions

Caution

(Note 1) The maximum speed may not be attained if the stroke is short.

(Note 2) The maximum acceleration varies depending on the operating

conditions.

(Note 3) The maximum cable length is 20 m for the SCON/SSEL and 30 m

for the XSEL. Specify a desired length in units of meters.

(Example: X08 = 8 m)

適応コントローラ仕様Applicable Controller Specifications Applicable controller

Maximum controlled

axesOperating method

Power-supply voltage

Reference page

XSEL

SSEL

SCON

6 axes

2 axes

1 axis

Program

Program/positioner

Pulse train/positioner

Single-phase/ three-phase AC 200 V

Single-phase AC100/200VSingle-phase AC100/200V

→P53

→P52

→P51

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

45 AAAA-BBBB

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eFlat typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

LSA-N19SS

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e Flat typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

StrokeLABCDEF

Weight(kg)

1445541345344

42925017.8

2886981

1786784

57332520.6

4328421

3228224

71740023.5

5769862669666

86147526.3

7201130

22101110

6100555029.2

8641274

2354

12546

114962532.0

10081418

398

13988

129370034.8

11521562

3242

15428

143777537.7

12961706

3386

16868

158185040.5

14401850

4130

183010

172592543.4

15841994

4274

197410

1869100046.2

17282138

518

211812

2013107549.1

18722282

5162

226212

2157115051.9

20162426

5306

240612

2301122554.8

21602570

650

255014

2445130057.6

23042714

6194

269414

2589137560.4

24482858

6338283814

2733145063.3

25923002

782

298216

2877152566.1

ME SE Home ME (*1)

193

120

45 10

E 50

10 10C

50B50

F

L (st+410)

1075 st 75

10260

Slot, depth 5

8H7

22532 193

18512110896

9997

493

2

72.1

260170

2525 1204040 90

85 85

1

+0.

015

0

D – M8, depth 20 PA × 200 PA × 200

D – M8, depth 20

φ8H7, reamed depth 5

108

(Rea

mer

pitc

h: ±

0.02

)

Cable

2 – φ8H7, reamed depth 10

8 – M8, depth 20

Medium type, 193 ,mm wideStandard type, single-slider

LSA N19SS I 300 T2

I: Incremental

specification

N: NoneS: 3mM: 5mX□□:

T2 : SCONSSELXSEL-P/-Q

Refer to the options

table below.

144:144mm

2592:2592mm

300 : 300W

* Refer to P. 13 for details on each item comprising the model name.

Type

■ Model Name

Series Encoder type Applicable drive output

Stroke Applicable controller

Cable length Options

LSA-N19SS

Options

Name

Cable track installation direction

CT2

CT3

CT4

→P14

→P14

→P14

Installation directions 2

Installation directions 3

Installation directions 4

Model Reference page Remarks

Model Specifications

Model Encoder type

I: Incremental

Applicable drive output (per slider)

300

Stroke Specified in

144-mm steps (mm)

144~2592

Speed (Note 1) (mm/sec)

Payload (Note 2)

Horizontal (kg)

Vertical (kg)

Maximum thrust (N)

2500 30 − Refer to P. 10

Maximum acceleration (G) (Note 2)

3

Rated thrust (N)

100LSA-N19SS-I-300- ① -T2- ② - ③

Common Specifications

* In the above model names, ① indicates the stroke, ② indicates the cable length, and ③ indicates the options.

Drive method

Positioning repeatability

Guide

Permissible load moment

Overhang load length

Base

Applicable controller

Cable length (Note 3)

Ambient operating temperature

Linear servo motor

±0.005mm

Built-in linear guide

Ma: 61.94N • m Mb: 61.94 • m Mc: 61.94N • m

700 mm or less in Ma direction / 700 mm or less in Mb/Mc directions

Material: Aluminum with black alumite treatment

T2: SCON, SSEL, XSEL-P/Q

N: No Cable S: 3m M: 5m X□□: Specified length

0 to 40°C, 85% RH or below (non-condensing)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions

Caution

(Note 1) The maximum speed may not be attained if the stroke is short.

(Note 2) The maximum acceleration varies depending on the operating

conditions.

(Note 3) The maximum cable length is 20 m for the SCON/SSEL and 30 m

for the XSEL. Specify a desired length in units of meters.

(Example: X08 = 8 m)

適応コントローラ仕様Applicable Controller Specifications Applicable controller

Maximum controlled

axesOperating method

Power-supply voltage

Reference page

XSEL

SSEL

SCON

6 axes

2 axes

1 axis

Program

Program/positioner

Pulse train/positioner

Single-phase/ three-phase AC 200 V

Single-phase AC100/200VSingle-phase AC100/200V

→P53

→P52

→P51

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

AAAA-BBBB 46

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

LSA-N19SM

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

Flat type st

st260

ME (*1) Home

Home ME (*1)

193

120

45 F F10

E 50

10 10C

50B50

L (st+770)

1075

75

10

260

Slot, depth 5

8H7

22532 193

18512110896

9997

493

2

72.1

260170

2525 1204040 90

85 85

1

+0.

015

0

D – M8, depth 20 PA × 200 PA × 200

100 (Minimum distance between sliders)

8 – M8, depth 202 – φ8H7, reamed depth 10

108

(Ream

er pit

ch: ±

0.02)

D – M8, depth 20

φ8H7, reamed depth 5

Medium type, 193 mm wideStandard type, multi-slider

LABCDEF

Stroke 72842

1322822

4717200

28.7

216986

266966

6861275

31.5

11302

2101110

61005350

34.4

12742

3541254

61149425

37.2

1418398

13988

1293500

40.1

15623

2421542

81437575

42.9

17063

3861686

81581650

45.8

18504

1301830

101725725

48.6

19944

2741974

101869800

51.5

21385

182118

122013875

54.3

22825

1622262

122157950

57.2

24265

3062406

1223011025

60.0

360 504 648 792 936 1080 1224 1368 1512 1656 18002570

650

255014

24451100

62.8

19442714

61942694

1425891175

65.7

20882858

6338

283814

27331250

68.5

22323002

782

298216

28771325

71.4

The photograph shows a

single-slider model.

LSA N19SM I 300 T2

I: Incremental

specification

N: NoneS: 3mM: 5mX□□:

T2 : SCONSSELXSEL-P/-Q

72:72mm

2232:2232mm

300 : 300W

* Refer to P. 13 for details on each item comprising the model name.

Type

■ Model Name

Series Encoder type Applicable drive output

Stroke Applicable controller

Cable length Options

LSA-N19SM

Options

Name Model

No options are available.

Reference page Remarks

Model Specifications

Model Encoder type

I: Incremental

Applicable drive output (per slider)

300

Stroke Specified in

144-mm steps (mm)

72~2232

Speed (Note 1) (mm/sec)

Payload (Note 2)

Horizontal (kg)

Vertical (kg)

Maximum thrust (N)

2500 30 − Refer to P. 10

Maximum acceleration (G) (Note 2)

3

Rated thrust (N)

100LSA-N19SM-I-300- ① -T2- ② - ③

Common Specifications

* In the above model names, ① indicates the stroke, ② indicates the cable length, and ③ indicates the options.

Drive method

Positioning repeatability

Guide

Permissible load moment

Overhang load length

Base

Applicable controller

Cable length (Note 3)

Ambient operating temperature

Linear servo motor

±0.005mm

Built-in linear guide

Ma: 61.94N • m Mb: 61.94 • m Mc: 61.94N • m

700 mm or less in Ma direction / 700 mm or less in Mb/Mc directions

Material: Aluminum with black alumite treatment

T2: SCON, SSEL, XSEL-P/Q

N: No Cable S: 3m M: 5m X□□: Specified length

0 to 40°C, 85% RH or below (non-condensing)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions

Caution

(Note 1) The maximum speed may not be attained if the stroke is short.

(Note 2) The maximum acceleration varies depending on the operating

conditions.

(Note 3) The maximum cable length is 20 m for the SCON/SSEL and 30 m

for the XSEL. Specify a desired length in units of meters.

(Example: X08 = 8 m)

適応コントローラ仕様Applicable Controller Specifications Applicable controller

Maximum controlled

axesOperating method

Power-supply voltage

Reference page

XSEL

SSEL

SCON

6 axes

2 axes

1 axis

Program

Program/positioner

Pulse train/positioner

Single-phase/ three-phase AC 200 V

Single-phase AC100/200VSingle-phase AC100/200V

→P53

→P52

→P51

Weight(kg)

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

47 AAAA-BBBB

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eFlat typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

LSA-W21SS

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e Flat typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

Options

Name

Cable track installation direction

Home limit switch

CT2

CT3

CT4

L

→P14

→P14

→P14

Installation directions 2

Installation directions 3

Installation directions 4

Standard feature

Model Reference page Remarks

StrokeLABCDEFGH

10501410205512105614

120076046.0

1185154572.5

716

172.5614

120083050.0

1320168014071640818

160090054.0

14551815207.5

716

107.5818

160097058.0

1590195075920175818

1600104062.0

17252085142.5

920

42.51022

2000112066.0

186022202109201101022

2000116070.0

1995235577.51124

177.51022

2000124074.0

213024901451124451226

2400131078.0

22652625212.5

1124

112.51226

2400138082.0

24002760801328

1801226

2400145086.0

25352895147.5

1328

47.51430

2800150090.0

267030302151328

1151430

2800157094.0

2805316582.51532

182.51430

2800164098.0

294033001501532501634

32001720102.0

30753435217.5

1532

117.51634

32001790106.0

32103570851736

1851634

32001840110.0

33453705152.5

1736

52.51838

36001910114.0

348038402201736

1201838

36001980118.0

3615397587.51940

187.51838

36002050122.0

375041101551940552042

40002120126.0

38854245222.5

1940

122.52042

40002200130.0

402043809021441902042

40002240134.0

41554515157.5

2144

57.52246

44002320138.0

4.51.5

7.3

4.3

13

φ9

160

GD

Detail view of I

Detail view of K

Section J-J

H

C – �φ9, depth 13(Refer to section J-J)

135

554655

±0.0280120

175.

5

2011

520

196

A

173

(*1)

81210

78100

20

K20817

L (st+360)

SE

ME

Home

ME

(25.5)7

37 st 286 377

(25.5)

(*1)The cable track may expand, in which case the above dimensionsmay be exceeded slightly.

PG/LSM

J

J

10

R4 0+0.

015

8

Slot, depth 5 (I)

PE × 200

PB × 200

φ8H7, depth 5 F – M8, depth 20(R

eam

er p

itch:

±0.

02)

4 – M8, depth 20 2 – φ6H7, depth 10

Large type, 210 mm wideStandard type, single-slider

Take note that the home direction cannot be changed on the W21SS after delivery. Caution

* With the large type, the home limit switch (L) is a standard feature.

LSA W21SS I 400 T2

I: Incremental

specification

N: NoneS: 3mM: 5mX□□:

T2 : SCONSSELXSEL-P/-Q

1050:1050mm

4155:4155mm

400 : 400W

* Refer to P. 13 for details on each item comprising the model name.

Type

■ Model Name

Series Encoder type Applicable drive output

Stroke Applicable controller

Cable length Options

CT2: Cable track Refer to the options belowCT3: Cable track Refer to the options belowCT4: Cable track Refer to the options below

LSA-W21SS

Model Specifications

Model Encoder type

I: Incremental

Applicable drive output (per slider)

400

Stroke Specified in

135-mm steps (mm)

1050~4155

Speed (Note 1) (mm/sec)

Payload (Note 2)

Horizontal (kg)

Vertical (kg)

Maximum thrust (N)

2500 60 − 600

Maximum acceleration (G) (Note 2)

3

Rated thrust (N)

200LSA-W21SS-I-400- ① -T2- ② - ③ -L* In the above model names, ① indicates the stroke, ② indicates the cable length, and ③ indicates the options.

Common Specifications

Drive method

Positioning repeatability

Guide

Permissible load moment

Overhang load length

Base

Applicable controller

Cable length (Note 3)

Ambient operating temperature

Linear servo motor

±0.005mm

Built-in linear guide

Ma: 128.7N • m Mb: 128.7 • m Mc: 128.7N • m

500 mm or less in Ma direction / 500 mm or less in Mb/Mc directions

Material: Aluminum with black alumite treatment

T2: SCON, SSEL, XSEL-P/Q

N: No Cable S: 3m M: 5m X□□: Specified length

0 to 40°C, 85% RH or below (non-condensing)

Caution

(Note 1) The maximum speed may not be attained if the stroke is short.

(Note 2) The maximum acceleration varies depending on the operating

conditions.

(Note 3) The maximum cable length is 20 m for the SCON/SSEL and 30 m

for the XSEL. Specify a desired length in units of meters.

(Example: X08 = 8 m)

適応コントローラ仕様Applicable Controller Specifications Applicable controller

Maximum controlled

axesOperating method

Power-supply voltage

Reference page

XSEL

SSEL

SCON

6 axes

2 axes

1 axis

Program

Program/positioner

Pulse train/positioner

Single-phase/ three-phase AC 200 V

Single-phase AC100/200VSingle-phase AC100/200V

→P53

→P52

→P51

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions

Weight(kg)

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

AAAA-BBBB 48

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

LSA-W21SM

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

LABCDEFGH

Stroke 7301410205

512105

614

120061057.0

865154572.5

716

172.5614

120068061.0

10001680140

71640818

160076065.0

11351815207.5

716

107.5818

160083069.0

12701950

75920175

818

160090073.0

14052085142.5

920

42.51022

200097077.0

15402220210

9201101022

2000104081.0

1675235577.51124

177.51022

2000112085.0

181024901451124451226

2400116089.0

19452625212.5

1124

112.51226

2400124093.0

20802760

8013281801226

2400131097.0

22152895147.5

1328

47.51430

28001380101.0

2350303021513281151430

28001450105.0

2485316582.51532

182.51430

28001500109.0

262033001501532501634

32001570113.0

27553435217.5

1532

117.51634

32001640117.0

28903570

8517361851634

32001720121.0

30253705152.5

1736

52.51838

36001790125.0

3160384022017361201838

36001840129.0

3295397587.51940

187.51838

36001910133.0

343041101551940552042

40001980137.0

35654245222.5

1940

122.52042

40002050141.0

37004380

9021441902042

40002120145.0

38354515157.5

2144

57.52246

44002200149.0

Options

Slot, depth 5 (I)

160

GD

10

R4 0+0.

015

8

4.51.5

7.3

4.3

13

φ9

17 208K

20100

78

210 81

173

(*1)

HH

stst

286

135

554655120±0.0280

175.

5

2011

520

196

Home

MEL (st+680) ME

Home(25.5)

737

286 377

(25.5)

A

MPG/LS

MPG/LS

Detail view of I

Detail view of K

Section J-J

34 (Minimum distance between sliders)

C – �φ9, depth 13(Refer to section J-J)

J

J

PB × 200

PE × 200

(Rea

mer

pitc

h: ±

0.02

)(*1)The cable track may expand, in which case the above dimensionsmay be exceeded slightly.

4 – M8, depth 20 2 – φ6H7, depth 10

φ8H7, depth 5 F – M8, depth 20

Large type, 210 mm wideStandard type, multi-slider

Name Model

Home limit switch L − Standard feature

Reference page Remarks

The photograph shows a

single-slider model.

* To change the cable track position to the opposite side, install the actuator byrotating it 180 degrees horizontally because the actuator is bilaterally symmetrical.

* With the large type, the home limit switch (L) is a standard feature.

LSA W21SM I 400 T2

I: Incremental

specification

N: NoneS: 3mM: 5mX□□:

T2 : SCONSSELXSEL-P/-Q

730:730mm

3835:3835mm

400 : 400W

* Refer to P. 13 for details on each item comprising the model name.

Type

■ Model Name

Series Encoder type Applicable drive output

Stroke Applicable controller

Cable length Options

LSA-W21SML: Home limit switch (standard)

Model Specifications

Model Encoder type

I: Incremental

Applicable drive output (per slider)

400

Stroke Specified in

135-mm steps (mm)

730~3835

Speed (Note 1) (mm/sec)

Payload (Note 2)

Horizontal (kg)

Vertical (kg)

Maximum thrust (N)

2500 60 − 600

Maximum acceleration (G) (Note 2)

3

Rated thrust (N)

200LSA-W21SM-I-400- ① -T2- ② -L* In the above model names, ① indicates the stroke, ② indicates the cable length, and ③ indicates the options.

Common Specifications

Drive method

Positioning repeatability

Guide

Permissible load moment

Overhang load length

Base

Applicable controller

Cable length (Note 3)

Ambient operating temperature

Linear servo motor

±0.005mm

Built-in linear guide

Ma: 128.7N • m Mb: 128.7 • m Mc: 128.7N • m

500 mm or less in Ma direction / 500 mm or less in Mb/Mc directions

Material: Aluminum with black alumite treatment

T2: SCON, SSEL, XSEL-P/Q

N: No Cable S: 3m M: 5m X□□: Specified length

0 to 40°C, 85% RH or below (non-condensing)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions

Caution

(Note 1) The maximum speed may not be attained if the stroke is short.

(Note 2) The maximum acceleration varies depending on the operating

conditions.

(Note 3) The maximum cable length is 20 m for the SCON/SSEL and 30 m

for the XSEL. Specify a desired length in units of meters.

(Example: X08 = 8 m)

適応コントローラ仕様Applicable Controller Specifications Applicable controller

Maximum controlled

axesOperating method

Power-supply voltage

Reference page

XSEL

SSEL

SCON

6 axes

2 axes

1 axis

Program

Program/positioner

Pulse train/positioner

Single-phase/ three-phase AC 200 V

Single-phase AC100/200VSingle-phase AC100/200V

→P53

→P52

→P51

Weight(kg)

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

49 AAAA-BBBB

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eFlat typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

LSA-W21HS

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e Flat typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

StrokeLABCDEFGH

8951410205512105614

120076050.0

1030154572.5

716

172.56

14120083054.0

1165168014071640818

160090058.0

13001815207.5

716

107.5818

160097062.0

1435195075920

175818

1600104066.0

15702085142.5

920

42.51022

2000112070.0

170522202109

201101022

2000116074.0

1840235577.51124

177.51022

2000124078.0

197524901451124451226

2400131082.0

21102625212.5

1124

112.51226

2400138086.0

22452760801328

1801226

2400145090.0

23802895147.5

1328

47.51430

2800150094.0

251530302151328

1151430

2800157098.0

2650316582.51532

182.51430

28001640102.0

278533001501532501634

32001720106.0

29203435217.5

1532

117.51634

32001790110.0

30553570851736

1851634

32001840114.0

31903705152.5

1736

52.51838

36001910118.0

332538402201736

1201838

36001980122.0

3460397587.51940

187.51838

36002050126.0

359541101551940552042

40002120130.0

37304245222.5

1940

122.52042

40002200134.0

386543809021441902042

40002240138.0

40004515157.5

2144

57.52246

44002320142.0

10

R4

+0.

015

08

4.51.5

7.3

4.3

13

φ9

160

G

D

A

173

(*1)

210208

100

78

K

φ8H7, depth 5 F – M8, depth 20

1720

81

ME

SE

MEL (st+515)40

(25.5)7

st 435 407

(25.5)

H

135

175.

5

2011

520

10246102200120

±0.02160

A

196

MPG/LS

J

J(R

eam

er p

itch:

±0.

02)

8 – M8, depth 20 2 – φ6H7, depth 10

(*1)The cable track may expand, in which case the above dimensionsmay be exceeded slightly.

Detail view of I

Detail view of K

Section J-JSlot, depth 5 (I)

C – �φ9, depth 13(Refer to section J-J)

PE × 200

PB × 200

Home

Large type, 210 mm wideHigh-thrust type, single-slider

LSA W21HS I 1000 T2

I: Incremental

specification

N: NoneS: 3mM: 5mX□□:

T2 :XSEL-P/-Q

895:895mm

4000:4000mm

1000: 1000W

* Refer to P. 13 for details on each item comprising the model name.

Type

■ Model Name

Series Encoder type Applicable drive output

Stroke Applicable controller

Cable length Options

CT2: Cable trackinstallation 2

CT3: Cable trackinstallation 3

LSA-W21HS

Options

Name

Cable track installation direction

Home limit switch

CT2

CT3

CT4

L

→P14

→P14

→P14

Installation directions 2

Installation directions 3

Installation directions 4

Standard feature

Model Reference page Remarks

* With the large type, the home limit switch (L) is a standard feature.

Model Specifications

Model Encoder type

I: Incremental

Applicable drive output (per slider)

1000

Stroke Specified in

135-mm steps (mm)

895~4000

Speed (Note 1) (mm/sec)

Payload (Note 2)

Horizontal (kg)

Vertical (kg)

Maximum thrust (N)

2500 120 − 1200

Maximum acceleration (G) (Note 2)

3

Rated thrust (N)

400LSA-W21HS-I-1000- ① -T2- ② - ③ -L* In the above model names, ① indicates the stroke, ② indicates the cable length, and ③ indicates the options.

Common Specifications

Drive method

Positioning repeatability

Guide

Permissible load moment

Overhang load length

Base

Applicable controller

Cable length (Note 3)

Ambient operating temperature

Linear servo motor

±0.005mm

Built-in linear guide

Ma: 275.2N • m Mb: 275.2 • m Mc: 275.2N • m

750 mm or less in Ma direction / 750 mm or less in Mb/Mc directions

Material: Aluminum with black alumite treatment

T2: XSEL-P/Q

N: No Cable S: 3m M: 5m X : Specified length

0 to 40°C, 85% RH or below (non-condensing)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions

Caution

(Note 1) The maximum speed may not be attained if the stroke is short.

(Note 2) The maximum acceleration varies depending on the operating

conditions.

(Note 3) The maximum cable length is 30 m. Specify a desired length in

units of meters.

(Example: X08 = 8 m)

適応コントローラ仕様Applicable Controller Specifications

Applicable controller

Maximum controlled

axesOperating method

Power-supply voltage

Reference page

XSEL 6 axes ProgramSingle-phase/

three-phase AC 200 V →P53

Weight(kg)

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

AAAA-BBBB 50

Linear Servo Actuator

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

eM

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

LSA-W21HM

Shaft typ

e S

mall typ

e M

edium

type

Large type

Flat type

StrokeLABCDEFGH

4201410205

512105

614

120054065.0

555154572.5

716

172.5614

120061069.0

6901680140

71640818

160068073.0

8251815207.5

716

107.5818

160076077.0

9601950

75920175

818

160083081.0

10952085142.5

920

42.51022

200090085.0

12302220210

9201101022

200097089.0

1365235577.51124

177.51022

2000104093.0

150024901451124451226

2400112097.0

16352625212.5

1124

112.51226

24001160101.0

17702760

801328

1801226

24001240105.0

19052895147.5

1328

47.51430

28001310109.0

204030302151328

1151430

28001380113.0

2175316582.51532

182.51430

28001450117.0

231033001501532501634

32001500121.0

24453435217.5

1532

117.51634

32001570125.0

25803570

851736

1851634

32001640129.0

27153705152.5

1736

52.51838

36001720133.0

285038402201736

1201838

36001790137.0

2985397587.51940

187.51838

36001840141.0

312041101551940552042

40001910145.0

32554245222.5

1940

122.52042

40001980149.0

33904380

9021441902042

40002050153.0

35254515157.5

2144

57.52246

44002120157.0

160

GD

A

stst435

H

H

196

135

175.

5

2011

520

10246102200120

±0.02160

A

L (st+990)

40

(25.5)7

435 407

(25.5)

81

2017

78100

208210

173

(*1)

ME

Home

C – �φ9, depth 13(Refer to section J-J)

40 (Minimum distance between sliders)ME

Home10

R4 +0.

015

08

4.51.5

7.3

4.3

13

φ9

Detail view of I

Detail view of K

Section J-JSlot, depth 5 (I)

PB × 200

PE × 200

J

J

(Rea

mer

pitc

h: ±

0.02

)

8 – M8, depth 20 2 – φ6H7, depth 10

K

(*1)The cable track may expand, in which case the above dimensionsmay be exceeded slightly.

φ8H7, depth 5 F – M8, depth 20

Large type, 210 mm wideHigh-thrust type, multi-slider

The photograph shows a

single-slider model.

LSA W21HM I 1000 T2

I: Incremental

specification

N: NoneS: 3mM: 5mX□□:

T2 : XSEL-P/-Q

420:420mm

3525:3525mm

1000 : 1000W

* Refer to P. 13 for details on each item comprising the model name.

Type

■ Model Name

Series Encoder type Applicable drive output

Stroke Applicable controller

Cable length Options

L: Home limit switch (standard)

LSA-W21HM

Options

Name Model

Home limit switch L − Standard feature

Reference page Remarks

* To change the cable track position to the opposite side, install the actuator byrotating it 180 degrees horizontally because the actuator is bilaterally symmetrical.

* With the large type, the home limit switch (L) is a standard feature.

Model Specifications

Model Encoder type

I: Incremental

Applicable drive output (per slider)

1000

Stroke Specified in

135-mm steps (mm)

420~3525

Speed (Note 1) (mm/sec)

Payload (Note 2)

Horizontal (kg)

Vertical (kg)

Maximum thrust (N)

2500 120 − 1200

Maximum acceleration (G) (Note 2)

3

Rated thrust (N)

400LSA-W21SM-I-1000- ① -T2- ② -L* In the above model names, ① indicates the stroke, ② indicates the cable length, and ③ indicates the options.

Common Specifications

Drive method

Positioning repeatability

Guide

Permissible load moment

Overhang load length

Base

Applicable controller

Cable length (Note 3)

Ambient operating temperature

Linear servo motor

±0.005mm

Built-in linear guide

Ma: 275.2N • m Mb: 275.2 • m Mc: 275.2N • m

750 mm or less in Ma direction / 750 mm or less in Mb/Mc directions

Material: Aluminum with black alumite treatment

T2: XSEL-P/Q

N: No Cable S: 3m M: 5m X□□: Specified length

0 to 40°C, 85% RH or below (non-condensing)

*1 During home return, the slider willmove to the ME. Accordingly, pay attention to possible contact between the slider and surrounding structures, etc.ME: Mechanical end SE: Stroke end

Dimensions

Applicable Controller Specifications (Note 1) The maximum speed may not be attained if the stroke is short.

(Note 2) The maximum acceleration varies depending on the operating

conditions.

(Note 3) The maximum cable length is 30 m. Specify a desired length in

units of meters.

(Example: X08 = 8 m)

Caution

Applicable controller

Maximum controlled

axesOperating method

Power-supply voltage

Reference page

XSEL 6 axes ProgramSingle-phase/

three-phase AC 200 V →P53

Weight(kg)

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

In addition to linear servo actuators, the SCON also lets you operate single-axis robots and ROBO Cylinders (RCS2 series) of varying output levels from 20 to 750 W with ease. Operation is very simple - all you need is to store various stopping positions in the controller, and then specify each desired position using an I/O signal from a host PLC. Up to 512 points can be stored for stopping positions.

Easy Operation of Linear Servo Actuators, Single-axis Robots and ROBO Cylinders (RCS2)

In addition to the positioner function where the actuator is operated according to specified positions, the SCON also lets you freely control the stopping position, speed and acceleration using pulses from the host positioning unit. This feature is ideal in applications where the target position changes every time or if you want to change the speed and acceleration freely.

At-will Operation Using Pulse-train Control

You can select six different functions including the solenoid mode where 3-point or 7-point positioning can be performed using control actions similar to when solenoid signals are used to move an air cylinder, and the teaching mode where the actuator can be jogged to a desired position for registration of the position where the actuator has stopped.

Select from 6 Functions via I/O Pattern Switching

● 1-axis position controller that lets you operate linear servoactuators, single-axis robots and ROBO Cylinders with ease

● Pulse-train control is also supported

Controller

If you select an optional network specification, the SCON can be connected directly to DeviceNet, CC-Link and ProfiBus (*1). In addition to connecting directly to a field network, you can also connect your SCON to a field network via a gateway unit. This way, the SCON can receive stopping position data via the network or send the current position data to a PLC.(*1) If the SCON is connected to a field network directly, its functions will be limited to the remote I/O level.

Direct Connection to DeviceNet, CC-Link and ProfiBus

N E W

51 52

In addition to linear servo actuators, the SSEL also lets you operate single-axis robots and ROBO Cylinders (RCS2 series) of varying output levels from 20 to 750 W. Since up to two axes can be controlled simultaneously, you can combine a large linear actuator with a single-axis robot, etc., to configure a system that transfers a load, performs coating or carries out other operations over a wide range.

Supporting Single-axis Robots and ROBO Cylinders (RCS2 Series) in Addition to Linear Servo Actuators

You can select the “Program Mode” where the actuator can be operated with the SSEL controller alone without using a PLC or other host device, or the “Positioner Mode” where the actuator is operated by issuing I/O signals from a PLC to specify desired position numbers pre-input to the SSEL. Use the program mode if your application involves coating, path operation or other interpolation operation, or when the SSEL must exchange I/O data frequently with an external device. For simple positioning operations, use the positioner mode.

Program Mode (High Function) and Positioner Mode (Easy Operation)

Operations of two actuator axes can be interpolated, which is ideal for coating and sealing operations, among others. The SSEL also offers excellent locus accuracy and uniformity of speed comparable to the XSEL, a higher version of the SSEL. As for synchronized operation, two axes can be controlled simultaneously without delay, even when the synchronized axes are high-speed actuators such as linear servo actuators.

Interpolation and Synchronized Operation of 2 Axes

● Very affordable 2-axis controller capable of operating in the program mode or positioner mode

● Easy way to operate linear servo actuators

USB has become a standard interface between PCs and various peripherals. The SSEL also comes standard with a USB port. Accordingly, you can use a standard USB cable to connect your SSEL to a PC, even when the PC has no RS232C terminal, to perform data communication.

Standard USB Port

A new function has been added to prevent two sliders from colliding with each other when operated independently in the multi-slider operation mode. This function is effective not only during automatic operation, but also while the actuators are manually jogged. With the collision prevention function, you can be assured of safety at all time.

Multi-slider Collision Prevention Function

■ Positioner mode ■ Program mode

External device(sequencer, etc.)

Externaldevice

Command to moveto the target position

Movement complete

Moving to thetarget position

1

3

2

All actions are preprogrammed

Variable calculation

Jogging

BCD input/output

Incremental movement

Position movement

Multi-tasking of 8 programs

External device control

Command pulses

Feedback pulses

Positioningmode

256-pointmode

512-pointmode

Solenoidmode 1

Solenoidmode 2

Teachingmode

II A

The sliders will stop if they become closer to each other than the specified distance.

Field network

Gatewayunit

N E W

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

In addition to linear servo actuators, the SCON also lets you operate single-axis robots and ROBO Cylinders (RCS2 series) of varying output levels from 20 to 750 W with ease. Operation is very simple - all you need is to store various stopping positions in the controller, and then specify each desired position using an I/O signal from a host PLC. Up to 512 points can be stored for stopping positions.

Easy Operation of Linear Servo Actuators, Single-axis Robots and ROBO Cylinders (RCS2)

In addition to the positioner function where the actuator is operated according to specified positions, the SCON also lets you freely control the stopping position, speed and acceleration using pulses from the host positioning unit. This feature is ideal in applications where the target position changes every time or if you want to change the speed and acceleration freely.

At-will Operation Using Pulse-train Control

You can select six different functions including the solenoid mode where 3-point or 7-point positioning can be performed using control actions similar to when solenoid signals are used to move an air cylinder, and the teaching mode where the actuator can be jogged to a desired position for registration of the position where the actuator has stopped.

Select from 6 Functions via I/O Pattern Switching

● 1-axis position controller that lets you operate linear servo actuators, single-axis robots and ROBO Cylinders with ease

● Pulse-train control is also supported

Controller

If you select an optional network specification, the SCON can be connected directly to DeviceNet, CC-Link and ProfiBus (*1). In addition to connecting directly to a field network, you can also connect your SCON to a field network via a gateway unit. This way, the SCON can receive stopping position data via the network or send the current position data to a PLC.(*1) If the SCON is connected to a field network directly, its functions will be limited to the remote I/O level.

Direct Connection to DeviceNet, CC-Link and ProfiBus

N E W

51 52

In addition to linear servo actuators, the SSEL also lets you operate single-axis robots and ROBO Cylinders (RCS2 series) of varying output levels from 20 to 750 W. Since up to two axes can be controlled simultaneously, you can combine a large linear actuator with a single-axis robot, etc., to configure a system that transfers a load, performs coating or carries out other operations over a wide range.

Supporting Single-axis Robots and ROBO Cylinders (RCS2 Series) in Addition to Linear Servo Actuators

You can select the “Program Mode” where the actuator can be operated with the SSEL controller alone without using a PLC or other host device, or the “Positioner Mode” where the actuator is operated by issuing I/O signals from a PLC to specify desired position numbers pre-input to the SSEL. Use the program mode if your application involves coating, path operation or other interpolation operation, or when the SSEL must exchange I/O data frequently with an external device. For simple positioning operations, use the positioner mode.

Program Mode (High Function) and Positioner Mode (Easy Operation)

Operations of two actuator axes can be interpolated, which is ideal for coating and sealing operations, among others. The SSEL also offers excellent locus accuracy and uniformity of speed comparable to the XSEL, a higher version of the SSEL. As for synchronized operation, two axes can be controlled simultaneously without delay, even when the synchronized axes are high-speed actuators such as linear servo actuators.

Interpolation and Synchronized Operation of 2 Axes

● Very affordable 2-axis controller capable ofoperating in the program mode or positioner mode

● Easy way to operate linear servo actuators

USB has become a standard interface between PCs and various peripherals. The SSEL also comes standard with a USB port. Accordingly, you can use a standard USB cable to connect your SSEL to a PC, even when the PC has no RS232C terminal, to perform data communication.

Standard USB Port

A new function has been added to prevent two sliders from colliding with each other when operated independently in the multi-slider operation mode. This function is effective not only during automatic operation, but also while the actuators are manually jogged. With the collision prevention function, you can be assured of safety at all time.

Multi-slider Collision Prevention Function

■ Positioner mode ■ Program mode

External device(sequencer, etc.)

Externaldevice

Command to moveto the target position

Movement complete

Moving to thetarget position

1

3

2

All actions are preprogrammed

Variable calculation

Jogging

BCD input/output

Incremental movement

Position movement

Multi-tasking of 8 programs

External device control

Command pulses

Feedback pulses

Positioningmode

256-pointmode

512-pointmode

Solenoidmode 1

Solenoidmode 2

Teachingmode

II A

The sliders will stop if they become closer to each other than the specified distance.

Field network

Gatewayunit

N E W

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

53 54

Up to six axes of linear servo actuators, single-axis robots and ROBO Cylinders (RCS series) can be operated. For example, you can operate with one XSEL controller a combination of two synchronized linear servo actuators for the X-axis, single-axis robot for the Y-axis and ROBO Cylinder for the Z-axis.

Operating Up to 6 Axes for a Total Power Output of 2,400 W

The XSEL series includes “global models” having no built-in drive-source cutoff circuit so that the controller can be used with an external safety circuit. You can configure a safety circuit to meet safety category 4 under ISO 13849-1.

A Lineup of “Global Models” Supporting Safety Category 4

In addition to standard PIO communication, the XSEL also offers optional specifications that support expansion PIO communication (maximum 192 input points and 192 output points) as well as various field networks (DeviceNet, CC-Link, ProfiBus and Ethernet). The XSEL also comes standard with a 2-channel RS232C communication function and also supports various other communication protocols.

Many Network Options Supporting DeviceNet, CC-Link, ProfiBus and Ethernet

The zone signal is a function that causes a signal to be output when the slider moves into a specified zone that can be set freely within the stroke range. This function is effective if you want to output signals at desired positions during coating or other operation. (Up to four signal zones can be set for each axis.)

Zone Signal

The XSEL conforms to the CE Mark standard as shipped, so you can use within your product bound for overseas countries.

CE Mark Certification

A function has been added to prevent two sliders from colliding with each other.

Multi-slider Collision Prevention Function

● High-function, multi-axis controller capable ofcontrolling up to six axes simultaneously (*1)

● Directly connectable to DeviceNet, CC-Link and otherfield networks*1 If all axes are linear servo actuators, only up to four axes can be connected.

A signal is output when the slider enters the specified zone.

PLC configurator Monitor

T-junction PC

X-SEL RCS-C

RCS

SCON

Single-axis robot

Linear servo actuator

Orthogonal robot

PC configuration software

X-SEL RCS-C

RCS

SCON

MonitorPLC

interface unit

■Controller Specifications

Power-supply capacity

Insulation resistance

Withstand voltage

Connected actuatorsLinear servo actuators (excluding W21HS/W21HM)

Single-axis robots (20 to 750 W)Linear servo actuators (all models)Single-axis robots (20 to 750 W)

3735 VA max.

DC 500 V, 10 MΩ or more

Single-phase AC 200 VThree-phase AC 200 V

2400

Program operation only

9999

16

20000

FLASHROM + SRAM battery backup

6 axes(or up to 4 axes of linear servo actuators)

AC 2500 V, 1 minute AC 1500 V, 1 minute

Redundancy not supported

Cut off by aninternal relay

Contact B input (Internal power feed)

Super SEL language

128

Redundancysupported

External safetycircuit

Contact B input (External powerfeed, redundant)

DC 500 V, 100 MΩ or more

AC 1500 V, 1 minute

Redundancy not supported

Cut off by an internal relay

Contact B input (Internal power feed)

Not supported

844 VA max.

Single-phase AC 100 VSingle-phase AC 200 V

300W (100 V power-supply specification)

750W (200 V power-supply specification)

1 axis

1652 VA max.

Single-phase AC 100 VSingle-phase AC 200 V

±10%

Incremental encoder/absolute encoder

1 mm/sec ~ (The maximum limit varies depending on the actuator.)

0.01G ~ (The maximum limit varies depending on the actuator.)

Teaching pendant or PC software

16 input points/16 output points (NPN/PNP selectable)

24 input points/8 output points (NPN/PNP selectable)

100(W)×202.6(H)×126(D)

(When the absolute battery is installed)

1.4kg

I/O flat cable (34 cores)

58(W)×200.5(H)×121(D) (Less than 400 W)

72(W)×200.5(H)×121(D) (400 W or more)

I/O flat cable (40 cores)

0.8kg 1.1kg

340(W)×195(H)×125.3(D)

(6-axis absolute specification)

5.7kg (6-axis absolute specification)

I/O flat cable (50 cores)

Up to 192 input points/192 output points

Teaching port (RS232C)2-channel RS232C port

DeviceNet, CC-Link, ProfiBus, Ethernet

System I/Os(Emergency stop input,

enable input, ready output)

Teaching port (RS232C)USB connector Teaching port (RS485)

DeviceNet, CC-Link, ProfiBus

Motor overcurrent, motor driver temperature check, overload check, encoder open check, soft limitovertravel, system error, battery error, etc.

0 to 40°C, 10 to 95% (non-condensing)

Free from corrosive gases. Not subject to significant powder dust.

System I/Os(Emergency stop input,

enable input, brake power)

System I/Os(Emergency stop input,

brake power)

Program operation Positioner operation

(Switchable)

Positioner operationPulse-train control

9999

8

20000

512 max.

EEPROM

(Will be supported in future versions)

FLASHROM(+ SRAM battery backup option)

Input power supply

Operating power-supplyvoltage range

Enable input

Speed setting

Acceleration setting

Operation method

Maximum number of controlled axesPosition detection method

Safety circuit configuration

Cutoff of drive source

Program language

Number of programs

Number of program steps

Number of multi-tasking programs

Number of positions

Data storage device

Data input method

Standard I/Os

Expansion I/Os

Serial communicationfunction

Other I/Os

Field networks

Protective functions

External dimensions

Weight

Surrounding air temperature/humidity

Surrounding ambient

Total maximum output of connected axes (W)

Controller series/type SCON SSELXSEL

P (standard) type Q (global) type

Single-axis robot

Linear servo actuator

Orthogonal robot

Basic sp

ecification

s C

on

trol sp

ecification

s P

rog

ram

I/O &

com

mu

nicatio

n

Gen

eral specificatio

ns

400W (100 V power-supply specification)

800W (200 V power-supply specification)

2 axes

32 input points/16 output points (NPN/PNP selectable)

Accessory

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

53 54

Up to six axes of linear servo actuators, single-axis robots and ROBO Cylinders (RCS series) can be operated. For example, you can operate with one XSEL controller a combination of two synchronized linear servo actuators for the X-axis, single-axis robot for the Y-axis and ROBO Cylinder for the Z-axis.

Operating Up to 6 Axes for a Total Power Output of 2,400 W

The XSEL series includes “global models” having no built-in drive-source cutoff circuit so that the controller can be used with an external safety circuit. You can configure a safety circuit to meet safety category 4 under ISO 13849-1.

A Lineup of “Global Models” Supporting Safety Category 4

In addition to standard PIO communication, the XSEL also offers optional specifications that support expansion PIO communication (maximum 192 input points and 192 output points) as well as various field networks (DeviceNet, CC-Link, ProfiBus and Ethernet). The XSEL also comes standard with a 2-channel RS232C communication function and also supports various other communication protocols.

Many Network Options Supporting DeviceNet, CC-Link, ProfiBus and Ethernet

The zone signal is a function that causes a signal to be output when the slider moves into a specified zone that can be set freely within the stroke range. This function is effective if you want to output signals at desired positions during coating or other operation. (Up to four signal zones can be set for each axis.)

Zone Signal

The XSEL conforms to the CE Mark standard as shipped, so you can use within your product bound for overseas countries.

CE Mark Certification

A function has been added to prevent two sliders from colliding with each other.

Multi-slider Collision Prevention Function

● High-function, multi-axis controller capable of controlling up to six axes simultaneously (*1)

● Directly connectable to DeviceNet, CC-Link and other field networks *1 If all axes are linear servo actuators, only up to four axes can be connected.

A signal is output when the slider enters the specified zone.

PLC configurator Monitor

T-junction PC

X-SEL RCS-C

RCS

SCON

Single-axis robot

Linear servo actuator

Orthogonal robot

PC configuration software

X-SEL RCS-C

RCS

SCON

MonitorPLC

interface unit

■Controller Specifications

Power-supply capacity

Insulation resistance

Withstand voltage

Connected actuatorsLinear servo actuators (excluding W21HS/W21HM)

Single-axis robots (20 to 750 W)Linear servo actuators (all models)Single-axis robots (20 to 750 W)

3735 VA max.

DC 500 V, 10 MΩ or more

Single-phase AC 200 VThree-phase AC 200 V

2400

Program operation only

9999

16

20000

FLASHROM + SRAM battery backup

6 axes(or up to 4 axes of linear servo actuators)

AC 2500 V, 1 minute AC 1500 V, 1 minute

Redundancy not supported

Cut off by aninternal relay

Contact B input (Internal power feed)

Super SEL language

128

Redundancysupported

External safetycircuit

Contact B input (External powerfeed, redundant)

DC 500 V, 100 MΩ or more

AC 1500 V, 1 minute

Redundancy not supported

Cut off by an internal relay

Contact B input (Internal power feed)

Not supported

844 VA max.

Single-phase AC 100 VSingle-phase AC 200 V

300W (100 V power-supply specification)

750W (200 V power-supply specification)

1 axis

1652 VA max.

Single-phase AC 100 VSingle-phase AC 200 V

±10%

Incremental encoder/absolute encoder

1 mm/sec ~ (The maximum limit varies depending on the actuator.)

0.01G ~ (The maximum limit varies depending on the actuator.)

Teaching pendant or PC software

16 input points/16 output points (NPN/PNP selectable)

24 input points/8 output points (NPN/PNP selectable)

100(W)×202.6(H)×126(D)

(When the absolute battery is installed)

1.4kg

I/O flat cable (34 cores)

58(W)×200.5(H)×121(D) (Less than 400 W)

72(W)×200.5(H)×121(D) (400 W or more)

I/O flat cable (40 cores)

0.8kg 1.1kg

340(W)×195(H)×125.3(D)

(6-axis absolute specification)

5.7kg (6-axis absolute specification)

I/O flat cable (50 cores)

Up to 192 input points/192 output points

Teaching port (RS232C)2-channel RS232C port

DeviceNet, CC-Link, ProfiBus, Ethernet

System I/Os(Emergency stop input,

enable input, ready output)

Teaching port (RS232C)USB connector Teaching port (RS485)

DeviceNet, CC-Link, ProfiBus

Motor overcurrent, motor driver temperature check, overload check, encoder open check, soft limitovertravel, system error, battery error, etc.

0 to 40°C, 10 to 95% (non-condensing)

Free from corrosive gases. Not subject to significant powder dust.

System I/Os(Emergency stop input,

enable input, brake power)

System I/Os(Emergency stop input,

brake power)

Program operation Positioner operation

(Switchable)

Positioner operationPulse-train control

9999

8

20000

512 max.

EEPROM

(Will be supported in future versions)

FLASHROM(+ SRAM battery backup option)

Input power supply

Operating power-supplyvoltage range

Enable input

Speed setting

Acceleration setting

Operation method

Maximum number of controlled axesPosition detection method

Safety circuit configuration

Cutoff of drive source

Program language

Number of programs

Number of program steps

Number of multi-tasking programs

Number of positions

Data storage device

Data input method

Standard I/Os

Expansion I/Os

Serial communicationfunction

Other I/Os

Field networks

Protective functions

External dimensions

Weight

Surrounding air temperature/humidity

Surrounding ambient

Total maximum output of connected axes (W)

Controller series/type SCON SSELXSEL

P (standard) type Q (global) type

Single-axis robot

Linear servo actuator

Orthogonal robot

Basic sp

ecification

s C

on

trol sp

ecification

s P

rog

ram

I/O &

com

mu

nicatio

n

Gen

eral specificatio

ns

400W (100 V power-supply specification)

800W (200 V power-supply specification)

2 axes

32 input points/16 output points (NPN/PNP selectable)

Accessory

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

Type Motor type

Motor type Motor type

Encoder type

Encodertype Encoder

type

I/O type Power-supply voltage

Power-supplyvoltage

I/O cable length

I/O cablelength

NP PIO NPN specification(standard)

PN PIO PNP specification

DV DeviceNet specification

CC CC-Link specification

PR ProfiBus specification

4 5m

0 No cable

2 2m

3 3m

I Incremental

A Absolute

1 Single-phase AC 100 V

2 Single-phase AC 200 VC Standard type

CS C O NSeries

TypeSeries

XS E L ( )Standard I/O Expansion I/O

(Slot 1) (Slot 2) (Slot 3) (Slot 4)

B

C

L

M

S

1 1-axis specification

2 2-axis specification

3 3-axis specification

4 4-axis specification

5 5-axis specification

6 6-axis specification

I

A

I

A

N1 32 inputs/16 outputs (NPN)

E Not used

N2 16 inputs/32 outputs (NPN)

N3 48 inputs/48 outputs (NPN)

P1 32 inputs/16 outputs (PNP)

P2 16 inputs/32 outputs (PNP)

P3 48 inputs/48 outputs (PNP)

DV DeviceNet connection board

CC CC-Link connection board

PR ProfiBus connection board

ET Ethernet connection board

2 Single-phase AC 200 V

3 Three-phase AC 200 V

0 No cable

2 2m

3 3m

5 5m

P Large-capacity type

QLarge-capacity typeconforming tosafety category

* For the fields for axis 2 to 6 details, specify the applicable information for the number of axes to be used.

200

300

400

1000

200

300

400

1000

S6SS / S6SM

S8SS / S8SM / S8HS / S8HM

S10SS / S10SM / S10HS / S10HM

H8SS / H8SM / H8HS / H8HM

L15SS / L15SM

N19SS / N19SM

W21SS / W21SM

100

200

300

400

S6SS / S6SM

S8SS / S8SM / S8HS / S8HM

S10SS / S10SM / S10HS / S10HM

H8SS / H8SM / H8HS / H8HM

L15SS / L15SM

N19SS / N19SM

W21SS / W21SM

W21HS / W21HM

S6SS / S6SM

S8SS / S8SM / S8HS / S8HM

S10SS / S10SM / S10HS / S10HM

H8SS / H8SM / H8HS / H8HM

L15SS / L15SM

N19SS / N19SM

W21SS / W21SM

W21HS / W21HMNumber of

connected axes (Axis 1 details) (Axis 2 details)

OptionsOptions

* Axis 2 details are not required if the controller is of 1-axis specification.

I/O type

B Brake

C Creep sensor

L Home sensor/LS

M Master axisspecification

S Slave axisspecification

B

C

L1 1-axis specification

2 2-axis specification

I

A

Incremental

Absolute

I

A

Incremental

Absolute

NP PIO NPN specification(standard)

PN PIO PNP specification

0 No cable

2 2m

3 3m

5 5m

C Standard type

C ( )S S E L

S6SS / S6SM

S8SS / S8SM / S8HS / S8HM

S10SS / S10SM / S10HS / S10HM

H8SS / H8SM / H8HS / H8HM

L15SS / L15SM

N19SS / N19SM

W21SS / W21SM

100

200

300

400

100

200

300

400

S6SS / S6SM

S8SS / S8SM / S8HS / S8HM

S10SS / S10SM / S10HS / S10HM

H8SS / H8SM / H8HS / H8HM

L15SS / L15SM

N19SS / N19SM

W21SS / W21SM

(Note) ● Large high-thrust actuators (W21H□) cannot be operated with the SSEL. Use an XSEL controller.

● If large actuators (W21□□) are to be operated, specify “L” in the options field.

● All linear servo actuator models are of incremental specification. Accordingly, absolute controllers cannot be used with

linear servo actuators.

(Note) ● All linear servo actuator models are of incremental specification. Accordingly, absolute controllers cannot be used with

linear servo actuators.

(Note) ● Although the XSEL controller can control up to six axes, take note that only up to four axes are accepted if all axes are

linear servo actuators. In other words, axes 5 and 6 should always be single-axis robots.

● If large high-thrust actuators (W21H□) are to be operated, take note that one large axis occupies the space for two axes

(axes 1 and 2, or axes 3 and 4).

● If large high-thrust actuators (W21□□) are to be operated, specify “L” in the options field.

● All linear servo actuator models are of incremental specification. Accordingly, absolute controllers cannot be used with

linear servo actuators.

1 Single-phase AC 100 V

2 Single-phase AC 200 V

Brake

Creep sensor

Home sensor/LS

Motor type Motor typeEncoder

typeEncoder

type

Power-supplyvoltage

I/O cablelengthTypeSeries Number of

connected axes (Axis 1 details) (Axis 2 to 6 details)

OptionsOptions

Brake

Creep sensor

Home sensor/LS

Master axisspecificationSlave axisspecification

B

C

L

M

S

Brake

Creep sensor

Home sensor/LS

Master axisspecificationSlave axisspecification

Incremental

Absolute

Incremental

Absolute

100 100

55 56

■Controller Model

Controller Model/Specifications

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

Type Motor type

Motor type Motor type

Encoder type

Encodertype Encoder

type

I/O type Power-supply voltage

Power-supplyvoltage

I/O cable length

I/O cablelength

NP PIO NPN specification(standard)

PN PIO PNP specification

DV DeviceNet specification

CC CC-Link specification

PR ProfiBus specification

4 5m

0 No cable

2 2m

3 3m

I Incremental

A Absolute

1 Single-phase AC 100 V

2 Single-phase AC 200 VC Standard type

CS C O NSeries

TypeSeries

XS E L ( )Standard I/O Expansion I/O

(Slot 1) (Slot 2) (Slot 3) (Slot 4)

B

C

L

M

S

1 1-axis specification

2 2-axis specification

3 3-axis specification

4 4-axis specification

5 5-axis specification

6 6-axis specification

I

A

I

A

N1 32 inputs/16 outputs (NPN)

E Not used

N2 16 inputs/32 outputs (NPN)

N3 48 inputs/48 outputs (NPN)

P1 32 inputs/16 outputs (PNP)

P2 16 inputs/32 outputs (PNP)

P3 48 inputs/48 outputs (PNP)

DV DeviceNet connection board

CC CC-Link connection board

PR ProfiBus connection board

ET Ethernet connection board

2 Single-phase AC 200 V

3 Three-phase AC 200 V

0 No cable

2 2m

3 3m

5 5m

P Large-capacity type

QLarge-capacity typeconforming tosafety category

* For the fields for axis 2 to 6 details, specify the applicable information for the number of axes to be used.

200

300

400

1000

200

300

400

1000

S6SS / S6SM

S8SS / S8SM / S8HS / S8HM

S10SS / S10SM / S10HS / S10HM

H8SS / H8SM / H8HS / H8HM

L15SS / L15SM

N19SS / N19SM

W21SS / W21SM

100

200

300

400

S6SS / S6SM

S8SS / S8SM / S8HS / S8HM

S10SS / S10SM / S10HS / S10HM

H8SS / H8SM / H8HS / H8HM

L15SS / L15SM

N19SS / N19SM

W21SS / W21SM

W21HS / W21HM

S6SS / S6SM

S8SS / S8SM / S8HS / S8HM

S10SS / S10SM / S10HS / S10HM

H8SS / H8SM / H8HS / H8HM

L15SS / L15SM

N19SS / N19SM

W21SS / W21SM

W21HS / W21HMNumber of

connected axes (Axis 1 details) (Axis 2 details)

OptionsOptions

* Axis 2 details are not required if the controller is of 1-axis specification.

I/O type

B Brake

C Creep sensor

L Home sensor/LS

M Master axisspecification

S Slave axisspecification

B

C

L1 1-axis specification

2 2-axis specification

I

A

Incremental

Absolute

I

A

Incremental

Absolute

NP PIO NPN specification(standard)

PN PIO PNP specification

0 No cable

2 2m

3 3m

5 5m

C Standard type

C ( )S S E L

S6SS / S6SM

S8SS / S8SM / S8HS / S8HM

S10SS / S10SM / S10HS / S10HM

H8SS / H8SM / H8HS / H8HM

L15SS / L15SM

N19SS / N19SM

W21SS / W21SM

100

200

300

400

100

200

300

400

S6SS / S6SM

S8SS / S8SM / S8HS / S8HM

S10SS / S10SM / S10HS / S10HM

H8SS / H8SM / H8HS / H8HM

L15SS / L15SM

N19SS / N19SM

W21SS / W21SM

(Note) ● Large high-thrust actuators (W21H□) cannot be operated with the SSEL. Use an XSEL controller.

● If large actuators (W21□□) are to be operated, specify “L” in the options field.

● All linear servo actuator models are of incremental specification. Accordingly, absolute controllers cannot be used with

linear servo actuators.

(Note) ● All linear servo actuator models are of incremental specification. Accordingly, absolute controllers cannot be used with

linear servo actuators.

(Note) ● Although the XSEL controller can control up to six axes, take note that only up to four axes are accepted if all axes are

linear servo actuators. In other words, axes 5 and 6 should always be single-axis robots.

● If large high-thrust actuators (W21H□) are to be operated, take note that one large axis occupies the space for two axes

(axes 1 and 2, or axes 3 and 4).

● If large high-thrust actuators (W21□□) are to be operated, specify “L” in the options field.

● All linear servo actuator models are of incremental specification. Accordingly, absolute controllers cannot be used with

linear servo actuators.

1 Single-phase AC 100 V

2 Single-phase AC 200 V

Brake

Creep sensor

Home sensor/LS

Motor type Motor typeEncoder

typeEncoder

type

Power-supplyvoltage

I/O cablelengthTypeSeries Number of

connected axes (Axis 1 details) (Axis 2 to 6 details)

OptionsOptions

Brake

Creep sensor

Home sensor/LS

Master axisspecification Slave axisspecification

B

C

L

M

S

Brake

Creep sensor

Home sensor/LS

Master axisspecification Slave axisspecification

Incremental

Absolute

Incremental

Absolute

100 100

55 56

■Controller Model

Controller Model/Specifications

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

57 58

I/O Signal Table

■ I/O Signal Table 【SCON Controller】The SCON controller basically operates actuators using I/O signals from a PLC. However, you can change the functions pre-assigned to respective I/Os. Select a desired I/O signal assignment pattern according to the specific conditions of use, from a total of seven modes including six positioner modes and one pulse-train mode.

SCON

Positioner mode

Pulse-train mode…………

* Signals with an asterisk (*) are negative-logic signals.

* Take note that network-ready controllers do not support pulse-train control.

Positioning mode

Teaching mode

256-point mode

512-point mode

Solenoid mode 1

Solenoid mode 2

The slider can be moved freely using pulses sent from a PLC or positioning unit.

Standard specification with 64 positioning points

Jog the slider to a desired position and input the position into the controller.

Up to 256 positioning points are supported (with PZONE signal).

Up to 512 positioning points are supported (without PZONE signal).

Up to seven positioning points are supported using signals resembling solenoid control actions

Up to three positioning points are supported using signals resembling solenoid control actions

1A

1B

2A

2B

3A

3B

4A

4B

5A

5B

6A

6B

7A

7B

8A

8B

9A

9B

10A

10B

11A

11B

12A

12B

13A

13B

14A

14B

15A

15B

16A

16B

17A

17B

P24

Input

Output

N

016

017

018

019

020

021

022

023

000

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

008

009

010

011

012

013

014

015

300

301

302

303

304

305

306

307

Program No. 1 selection

Program No. 2 selection

Program No. 4 selection

Program No. 8 selection

Program No. 10 selection

Program No. 20 selection

Program No. 40 selection

CPU reset

Start

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

Alarm

Ready

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

Position input 10

Position input 11

Position input 12

Position input 13

Error reset

Start

Home return

Servo ON

Push

Pause

Cancel

Interpolation setting

Position input 1

Position input 2

Position input 3

Position input 4

Position input 5

Position input 6

Position input 7

Position input 8

Position input 9

Alarm

Ready

Positioning complete

Home return complete

Servo ON output

Push complete

System battery error

Absolute battery error

Input 10

Input 11

Input 12

Input 13

Input 14

Input 15

Input 16

Error reset

Start

Home return

Servo ON

Push

Pause

Cancel

Interpolation setting

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

Input 5

Input 6

Input 7

Input 8

Input 9

Alarm

Ready

Positioning complete

Home return complete

Servo ON output

Push complete

System battery error

Absolute battery error

Position input 7

Position input 8

Position input 9

Position input 10

Position input 11

Position input 12

Position input 13

Error reset

Axis 1 start

Axis 1 home return

Axis 1 servo ON

Axis 1 pause

Axis 1 cancellation

Axis 2 start

Axis 2 home return

Axis 2 servo ON

Axis 2 pause

Axis 2 cancellation

Position input 1

Position input 2

Position input 3

Position input 4

Position input 5

Position input 6

Alarm

Ready

Axis 1 positioning complete

Axis 1 home return complete

Axis 1 servo ON output

Axis 2 positioning complete

Axis 2 home return complete

Axis 2 servo ON output

Axis 1 jog -

Axis 2 jog +

Axis 2 jog -

Inching specification (0.01 mm)

Inching specification (0.1 mm)

Inching specification (0.5 mm)

Inching specification (1 mm)

Error reset

Start

Servo ON

Pause

Position input 1

Position input 2

Position input 3

Position input 4

Position input 5

Position input 6

Position input 7

Position input 8

Position input 9

Position input 10

Position input 11

Teaching mode specification

Axis 1 jog +

Alarm

Ready

Positioning complete

Home return complete

Servo ON output

System battery error

Absolute battery error

Position No. 1000

CPU reset

Start

Hold (pause)

Cancellation

Interpolation setting

Position No. 1

Position No. 2

Position No. 4

Position No. 8

Position No. 10

Position No. 20

Position No. 40

Position No. 80

Position No. 100

Position No. 200

Position No. 400

Position No. 800

Alarm

Ready

Positioning complete

System battery error

Absolute battery error

PinNo.

BoardNo. Program modeCategory

Standard mode Model switching mode 2-axis independent mode

24 V input

0V input

Positioner mode

Teaching mode DS-S-C1 compatible mode

■ I/O Signal Table 【SSEL Controller】With the SSEL controller, you can select the “Program Mode” where a program is input to operate the actuator, or the “Positioner Mode” where the actuator moves to the position specified by a signal received from a host PLC. The positioner mode includes five input patterns suitable for different applications, so you can select a desired pattern to match the specific operation of your equipment. (Please contact IAI for details.)

SSEL

Program mode…………

Positioner mode

One controller is all you need for both actuator operation and communication with external devices.

Arc interpolation and path operation are also supported.

Standard mode………………

Model switching mode……...

2-axis independent mode…..

Teaching mode……………….

DS-S-C1 compatible mode…

Up to 1,500 positioning points are supported. Push-motion operation is also possible.

The model number can be specified in addition to the position. Different positions

can be specified for different models using the same position number.

Two axes can be operated (started/stopped) independently.

Positions can be externally taught and registered.

The I/O assignment is the same as that of the existing DS-S-C1 controller, so you

can directly swap your DS-S-C1 controller with an SSEL.

* Positions can be input as either binary data or BCD data by switching the applicable setting.

…..

..……

……

……

……

……

1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8A9A

10A11A12A13A14A15A16A17A18A19A20A1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8B9B

10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B

24V

24V

Input

Output

0V

0V

IN0IN1IN2IN3IN4IN5IN6IN7IN8IN9IN10IN11IN12IN13IN14IN15OUT0OUT1OUT2OUT3OUT4OUT5OUT6OUT7OUT8OUT9OUT10OUT11OUT12OUT13OUT14OUT15

64 points×o

PC1PC2PC4PC8PC16PC32MODEJISL

JOG+JOG−RMODHOME*STP

CSTR/PWRTRESSONPM1PM2PM4PM8PM16PM32MOVE

MODESPZONERMDSHEND

PEND/WENDSV

*EMGS*ALM

*BALM

64 pointsoo

PC1PC2PC4PC8PC16PC32

−−−

BKRLRMODHOME*STPCSTRRESSONPM1PM2PM4PM8PM16PM32MOVEZONE1PZONERMDSHENDPEND

SV*EMGS*ALM

*BALM

256 points×o

PC1PC2PC4PC8PC16PC32PC64PC128

−BKRLRMODHOME*STPCSTRRESSONPM1PM2PM4PM8PM16PM32PM64PM128PZONERMDSHENDPEND

SV*EMGS*ALM

*BALM

512 points××

PC1PC2PC4PC8PC16PC32PC64PC128PC256BKRLRMODHOME*STPCSTRRESSONPM1PM2PM4PM8PM16PM32PM64PM128PN256RMDSHENDPEND

SV*EMGS*ALM

*BALM

P24P24NCNC

−−NN

7 pointsoo

ST0ST1ST2ST3ST4ST5ST6

−−

BKRLRMODHOME*STP

−RESSONPE0PE1PE2PE3PE4PE5PE6

ZONE1PZONERMDSHENDPEND

SV*EMGS*ALM

*BALM

3 pointsoo

ST0ST1 (JOG+)

ST2−−−−−−

BKRLRMOD

−−−

RESSONLS0

LS1 (TRQS)LS2

−−−−

ZONE1PZONERMDSHEND

−SV

*EMGS*ALM

*BALM

−××

P24P24NCNC

SONRES

HOMETL

CSTPDCLRBKRLRMOD

−−−−−−−−

PWRSVINP

HENDTLR

*ALM*EMGSRMDSALM1ALM2ALM4ALM8

−−−−−−NN

Number of positioning points

Zone signalP zone signal

Pin

No

.

Ca

teg

ory

Parameter (PIO pattern) selection Pulse-train mode

0

Pulse-train mode

5

Solenoid mode 2

4

Solenoid mode 1

3

512-point mode

2

256-point mode

1

Teaching mode

0

Positioning mode

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

57 58

I/O Signal Table

■ I/O Signal Table 【SCON Controller】The SCON controller basically operates actuators using I/O signals from a PLC. However, you can change the functions pre-assigned to respective I/Os. Select a desired I/O signal assignment pattern according to the specific conditions of use, from a total of seven modes including six positioner modes and one pulse-train mode.

SCON

Positioner mode

Pulse-train mode…………

* Signals with an asterisk (*) are negative-logic signals.

* Take note that network-ready controllers do not support pulse-train control.

Positioning mode

Teaching mode

256-point mode

512-point mode

Solenoid mode 1

Solenoid mode 2

The slider can be moved freely using pulses sent from a PLC or positioning unit.

Standard specification with 64 positioning points

Jog the slider to a desired position and input the position into the controller.

Up to 256 positioning points are supported (with PZONE signal).

Up to 512 positioning points are supported (without PZONE signal).

Up to seven positioning points are supported using signals resembling solenoid control actions

Up to three positioning points are supported using signals resembling solenoid control actions

1A

1B

2A

2B

3A

3B

4A

4B

5A

5B

6A

6B

7A

7B

8A

8B

9A

9B

10A

10B

11A

11B

12A

12B

13A

13B

14A

14B

15A

15B

16A

16B

17A

17B

P24

Input

Output

N

016

017

018

019

020

021

022

023

000

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

008

009

010

011

012

013

014

015

300

301

302

303

304

305

306

307

Program No. 1 selection

Program No. 2 selection

Program No. 4 selection

Program No. 8 selection

Program No. 10 selection

Program No. 20 selection

Program No. 40 selection

CPU reset

Start

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

Alarm

Ready

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

Position input 10

Position input 11

Position input 12

Position input 13

Error reset

Start

Home return

Servo ON

Push

Pause

Cancel

Interpolation setting

Position input 1

Position input 2

Position input 3

Position input 4

Position input 5

Position input 6

Position input 7

Position input 8

Position input 9

Alarm

Ready

Positioning complete

Home return complete

Servo ON output

Push complete

System battery error

Absolute battery error

Input 10

Input 11

Input 12

Input 13

Input 14

Input 15

Input 16

Error reset

Start

Home return

Servo ON

Push

Pause

Cancel

Interpolation setting

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

Input 5

Input 6

Input 7

Input 8

Input 9

Alarm

Ready

Positioning complete

Home return complete

Servo ON output

Push complete

System battery error

Absolute battery error

Position input 7

Position input 8

Position input 9

Position input 10

Position input 11

Position input 12

Position input 13

Error reset

Axis 1 start

Axis 1 home return

Axis 1 servo ON

Axis 1 pause

Axis 1 cancellation

Axis 2 start

Axis 2 home return

Axis 2 servo ON

Axis 2 pause

Axis 2 cancellation

Position input 1

Position input 2

Position input 3

Position input 4

Position input 5

Position input 6

Alarm

Ready

Axis 1 positioning complete

Axis 1 home return complete

Axis 1 servo ON output

Axis 2 positioning complete

Axis 2 home return complete

Axis 2 servo ON output

Axis 1 jog -

Axis 2 jog +

Axis 2 jog -

Inching specification (0.01 mm)

Inching specification (0.1 mm)

Inching specification (0.5 mm)

Inching specification (1 mm)

Error reset

Start

Servo ON

Pause

Position input 1

Position input 2

Position input 3

Position input 4

Position input 5

Position input 6

Position input 7

Position input 8

Position input 9

Position input 10

Position input 11

Teaching mode specification

Axis 1 jog +

Alarm

Ready

Positioning complete

Home return complete

Servo ON output

System battery error

Absolute battery error

Position No. 1000

CPU reset

Start

Hold (pause)

Cancellation

Interpolation setting

Position No. 1

Position No. 2

Position No. 4

Position No. 8

Position No. 10

Position No. 20

Position No. 40

Position No. 80

Position No. 100

Position No. 200

Position No. 400

Position No. 800

Alarm

Ready

Positioning complete

System battery error

Absolute battery error

PinNo.

BoardNo. Program modeCategory

Standard mode Model switching mode 2-axis independent mode

24 V input

0V input

Positioner mode

Teaching mode DS-S-C1 compatible mode

■ I/O Signal Table 【SSEL Controller】With the SSEL controller, you can select the “Program Mode” where a program is input to operate the actuator, or the “Positioner Mode” where the actuator moves to the position specified by a signal received from a host PLC. The positioner mode includes five input patterns suitable for different applications, so you can select a desired pattern to match the specific operation of your equipment. (Please contact IAI for details.)

SSEL

Program mode…………

Positioner mode

One controller is all you need for both actuator operation and communication with external devices.

Arc interpolation and path operation are also supported.

Standard mode………………

Model switching mode……...

2-axis independent mode…..

Teaching mode……………….

DS-S-C1 compatible mode…

Up to 1,500 positioning points are supported. Push-motion operation is also possible.

The model number can be specified in addition to the position. Different positions

can be specified for different models using the same position number.

Two axes can be operated (started/stopped) independently.

Positions can be externally taught and registered.

The I/O assignment is the same as that of the existing DS-S-C1 controller, so you

can directly swap your DS-S-C1 controller with an SSEL.

* Positions can be input as either binary data or BCD data by switching the applicable setting.

…..

..……

……

……

……

……

1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8A9A10A11A12A13A14A15A16A17A18A19A20A1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8B9B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B

24V

24V

Input

Output

0V

0V

IN0IN1IN2IN3IN4IN5IN6IN7IN8IN9IN10IN11IN12IN13IN14IN15OUT0OUT1OUT2OUT3OUT4OUT5OUT6OUT7OUT8OUT9OUT10OUT11OUT12OUT13OUT14OUT15

64 points×o

PC1PC2PC4PC8PC16PC32MODEJISL

JOG+JOG−RMODHOME*STP

CSTR/PWRTRESSONPM1PM2PM4PM8PM16PM32MOVE

MODESPZONERMDSHEND

PEND/WENDSV

*EMGS*ALM

*BALM

64 pointsoo

PC1PC2PC4PC8PC16PC32

−−−

BKRLRMODHOME*STPCSTRRESSONPM1PM2PM4PM8PM16PM32MOVEZONE1PZONERMDSHENDPEND

SV*EMGS*ALM

*BALM

256 points×o

PC1PC2PC4PC8PC16PC32PC64PC128

−BKRLRMODHOME*STPCSTRRESSONPM1PM2PM4PM8PM16PM32PM64PM128PZONERMDSHENDPEND

SV*EMGS*ALM

*BALM

512 points××

PC1PC2PC4PC8PC16PC32PC64PC128PC256BKRLRMODHOME*STPCSTRRESSONPM1PM2PM4PM8PM16PM32PM64PM128PN256RMDSHENDPEND

SV*EMGS*ALM

*BALM

P24P24NCNC

−−NN

7 pointsoo

ST0ST1ST2ST3ST4ST5ST6

−−

BKRLRMODHOME*STP

−RESSONPE0PE1PE2PE3PE4PE5PE6

ZONE1PZONERMDSHENDPEND

SV*EMGS*ALM

*BALM

3 pointsoo

ST0ST1 (JOG+)

ST2−−−−−−

BKRLRMOD

−−−

RESSONLS0

LS1 (TRQS)LS2

−−−−

ZONE1PZONERMDSHEND

−SV

*EMGS*ALM

*BALM

−××

P24P24NCNC

SONRES

HOMETL

CSTPDCLRBKRLRMOD

−−−−−−−−

PWRSVINP

HENDTLR

*ALM*EMGSRMDSALM1ALM2ALM4ALM8

−−−−−−NN

Number of positioning points

Zone signalP zone signal

Pin

No

.

Ca

teg

ory

Parameter (PIO pattern) selection Pulse-train mode

0

Pulse-train mode

5

Solenoid mode 2

4

Solenoid mode 1

3

512-point mode

2

256-point mode

1

Teaching mode

0

Positioning mode

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

59 60

I/O Signal Table External Dimensions/Options

■ I/O Signal Table 【XSEL Controller】With the XSEL controller, the number of I/O points can be increased by installing up to three expansion I/O boards in addition to the standard I/O board. You can select a desired type of expansion I/O board offering ① 32 input points/16 output points (model N1/P1), ② 16 input points/32 output points (model N2/P2), or ③ 48 input points/48 output points (model N3/P3). ■ Standard I/O Assignment Table

(Model N1/P1) ■ Expansion I/O Assignment Table

(Model N1/P1)■ Expansion I/O Assignment Table

(Model N2/P2)■ Expansion I/O Assignment Table

(Model N3/P3)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

24 V input (pin Nos. 2 to 25/51 to 74)

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

24 V input (pin Nos. 27 to 50/76 to 99)

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

P24

P24

N

N

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

80

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

90

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

100

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

0 V input (pin Nos. 2 to 25/51 to 74)

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

0 V input (pin Nos. 27 to 50/76 to 99)

BoardNo.

Standard setting

Category

PinNo.

BoardNo.

Standard settingCategory

PinNo.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

24 V input

Program start

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

Program setting (No. 1)

Program setting (No. 2)

Program setting (No. 4)

Program setting (No. 8)

Program setting (No. 10)

Program setting (No. 20)

Program setting (No. 40)

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

Alarm output

Ready output

Emergency stop output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

0 V input

BoardNo.

Standardsetting

Category

PinNo.

P24

N

Output

Output

Input

Input

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

24 V input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

0 V input

P24

N

BoardNo.

Standardsetting

Category

PinNo.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

P24

N

BoardNo.

Standardsetting

Category

PinNo.

Input

24 V input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

0 V input

■External Dimensions【SCON】

【SSEL】 (Common to 1-axis and 2-axis Specifications)

【XSEL】Axes 1 to 4 Axes 5, 6 Side view (common)

Type P[Standard

specification]

Type Q[Global

specification]

* The single-phase200V AC specificationconforms to thedimensions of type P.

125.33

249265

180

186

195

49.5757549.5

5

3-φ5

222206

28757528

5

3-φ5

180

186

195

284300

2212012022

5

3-φ5

180

186

195

241257

45.5757545.5

5

3-φ5

180

186

195

(Note 1) Absolute-data backup battery. This battery is not installedif the controller is of incremental specification.

72

4.2

184

519

4(2

00.5

)

φ4.243 121

Less than 400 W 400 W or more

58

4.2

184

177

202.

6

186

195

519

4(2

00.5

)

φ4.229 121

When the absolute battery is installed

(Note 1)

126100

(80)

When the absolute battery is installed

Output

InputInput

OutputOutput

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

59 60

I/O Signal Table External Dimensions/Options

■ I/O Signal Table 【XSEL Controller】With the XSEL controller, the number of I/O points can be increased by installing up to three expansion I/O boards in addition to the standard I/O board. You can select a desired type of expansion I/O board offering ① 32 input points/16 output points (model N1/P1), ② 16 input points/32 output points (model N2/P2), or ③ 48 input points/48 output points (model N3/P3). ■ Standard I/O Assignment Table

(Model N1/P1) ■ Expansion I/O Assignment Table

(Model N1/P1)■ Expansion I/O Assignment Table

(Model N2/P2)■ Expansion I/O Assignment Table

(Model N3/P3)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

24 V input (pin Nos. 2 to 25/51 to 74)

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

24 V input (pin Nos. 27 to 50/76 to 99)

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

P24

P24

N

N

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

80

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

90

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

100

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

0 V input (pin Nos. 2 to 25/51 to 74)

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

0 V input (pin Nos. 27 to 50/76 to 99)

BoardNo.

Standard setting

Category

PinNo.

BoardNo.

Standard setting

Category

PinNo.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

24 V input

Program start

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

Program setting (No. 1)

Program setting (No. 2)

Program setting (No. 4)

Program setting (No. 8)

Program setting (No. 10)

Program setting (No. 20)

Program setting (No. 40)

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

Alarm output

Ready output

Emergency stop output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

0 V input

BoardNo.

Standardsetting

Category

PinNo.

P24

N

Output

Output

Input

Input

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

24 V input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

0 V input

P24

N

BoardNo.

Standardsetting

Category

PinNo.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

P24

N

BoardNo.

Standardsetting

Category

PinNo.

Input

24 V input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose input

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

General-purpose output

0 V input

■External Dimensions【SCON】

【SSEL】 (Common to 1-axis and 2-axis Specifications)

【XSEL】Axes 1 to 4 Axes 5, 6 Side view (common)

Type P[Standard

specification]

Type Q[Global

specification]

* The single-phase200V AC specificationconforms to thedimensions of type P.

125.33

249265

180

186

195

49.5757549.5

5

3-φ5

222206

28757528

5

3-φ5

180

186

195

284300

2212012022

5

3-φ5

180

186

195

241257

45.5757545.5

5

3-φ5

180

186

195

(Note 1) Absolute-data backup battery. This battery is not installedif the controller is of incremental specification.

72

4.2

184

519

4(2

00.5

)

φ4.243 121

Less than 400 W 400 W or more

58

4.2

184

177

202.

6

186

195

519

4(2

00.5

)

φ4.229 121

When the absolute battery is installed

(Note 1)

126100

(80)

When the absolute battery is installed

Output

InputInput

OutputOutput

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

61 62

External Dimensions/Options

■ List of Options/Replacement Parts

Teaching pendant (standard)

Teaching pendant (with deadman switch)

Teaching pendant (ANSI type)

Data setting unit

PC software (with RS232 cable)

PC software (safety category 4)

PC software (with USB cable)

PC software (USB conversion specification)

Regenerative resistance unit

Panel unit

Expansion I/O board

Expansion I/O board

Expansion I/O board

Expansion I/O board

Expansion I/O board

Expansion I/O board

Absolute-data backup battery

Dummy plug

USB conversion adapter

USB cable

Connector conversion cable

RCM-T

RCM-E

IA-T-X-J

IA-T-X

RCM-TD

IA-T-XD-J

IA-T-XD

IA-T-XA-J

IA-T-XA

RCM-P

RCM-101-MW

IA-101-X-MW-J

IA-101-X-MW

IA-101-XA-MW

IA-101-X-USB

IA-101-X-USBMW

RCM-101-USB

REU-1

REU-2

PU-1

IA-103-X-32

IA-103-X-32-P

IA-103-X-16

IA-103-X-16-P

IA-IO-3204-NP

IA-IO-3204-PN

AB-5

DP-3

IA-CV-USB

RCB-CV-USB

CB-SEL-USB010

CB-SEL-SJ002

With connector conversion cable

With connector conversion cable

With connector conversion cable

With connector conversion cable

D-sub, 9-pin connector on PC end

D-sub, 9-pin connector on PC end

USB connector on PC end

USB connector on PC end

For XSEL controller

For SSEL controller or SCON controller

Cable length: 3 m

32 input points/16 output points, NPN specification

32 input points/16 output points, PNP specification

16 input points/32 output points, NPN specification

16 input points/32 output points, PNP specification

48 input points/48 output points, NPN specification

48 input points/48 output points, PNP specification

Cable length: 1 m

Cable length: 0.2 m

Item Model Remarks SSELSCON XSEL

■ Feature

■ Feature

■ Options

Teaching Pendant

PC Software (Windows Only)

Teaching device offering functions for position input, test operation, monitoring, and more.

■ Model

■ Model

RCM-T (standard type)

RCM-TD (deadman switch type)

RCM-E (simplified teaching pendant)

RCM-P (data setting unit)

■ Configuration

■ Model

■ Configuration

■ Configuration

Startup support software equipped with functions for program/position input, test operation, monitoring, and more. Improved debugging functions help you reduce the time required for initial startup.

RCM-101-MW(with external device communication cable + RS232 conversion unit)

RCM-T/TD RCM-E RCM-P

■ Specifications

Surrounding airtemperature/humidity

Surrounding ambience

Weight

Cable length

Display

Approx. 650g

LCD display with21 characters x 16 lines

Temperature 0 to 40°C / Humidity 85% RH or below

Free from corrosive gases. Not subject to significant powder dust.

Approx. 400g

5m

LCD display with 16 characters x 2 lines

Approx. 360g

LCD display with 16 characters x 2 lines

Item RCM-T-TD RCM-E RCM-P

0.3m

5m

5m

Applicable controllerSCON

Applicable controllerSCON

External device communication cableCB-RCA-SIO050

External device communication cableCB-RCA-SIO050

PC software (CD)

PC software (CD)

RS232 conversion adapter RCB-CV-MW

RCM-101-USB(with external device communication cable + USB conversion unit + USB cable)

5m1m

USB cableCB-SEL-USB010

USB conversion adapterRCB-CV-USB

80

105 7.532.5

φ4.8

249.

5

21

6.326.215.1

23.5

43

148.

5

7 (34)72.5

(113.5)

140

2386

ESC

987654

0321

IAI

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

61 62

External Dimensions/Options

■ List of Options/Replacement Parts

Teaching pendant (standard)

Teaching pendant (with deadman switch)

Teaching pendant (ANSI type)

Data setting unit

PC software (with RS232 cable)

PC software (safety category 4)

PC software (with USB cable)

PC software (USB conversion specification)

Regenerative resistance unit

Panel unit

Expansion I/O board

Expansion I/O board

Expansion I/O board

Expansion I/O board

Expansion I/O board

Expansion I/O board

Absolute-data backup battery

Dummy plug

USB conversion adapter

USB cable

Connector conversion cable

RCM-T

RCM-E

IA-T-X-J

IA-T-X

RCM-TD

IA-T-XD-J

IA-T-XD

IA-T-XA-J

IA-T-XA

RCM-P

RCM-101-MW

IA-101-X-MW-J

IA-101-X-MW

IA-101-XA-MW

IA-101-X-USB

IA-101-X-USBMW

RCM-101-USB

REU-1

REU-2

PU-1

IA-103-X-32

IA-103-X-32-P

IA-103-X-16

IA-103-X-16-P

IA-IO-3204-NP

IA-IO-3204-PN

AB-5

DP-3

IA-CV-USB

RCB-CV-USB

CB-SEL-USB010

CB-SEL-SJ002

With connector conversion cable

With connector conversion cable

With connector conversion cable

With connector conversion cable

D-sub, 9-pin connector on PC end

D-sub, 9-pin connector on PC end

USB connector on PC end

USB connector on PC end

For XSEL controller

For SSEL controller or SCON controller

Cable length: 3 m

32 input points/16 output points, NPN specification

32 input points/16 output points, PNP specification

16 input points/32 output points, NPN specification

16 input points/32 output points, PNP specification

48 input points/48 output points, NPN specification

48 input points/48 output points, PNP specification

Cable length: 1 m

Cable length: 0.2 m

Item Model Remarks SSELSCON XSEL

■ Feature

■ Feature

■ Options

Teaching Pendant

PC Software (Windows Only)

Teaching device offering functions for position input, test operation, monitoring, and more.

■ Model

■ Model

RCM-T (standard type)

RCM-TD (deadman switch type)

RCM-E (simplified teaching pendant)

RCM-P (data setting unit)

■ Configuration

■ Model

■ Configuration

■ Configuration

Startup support software equipped with functions for program/position input, test operation, monitoring, and more. Improved debugging functions help you reduce the time required for initial startup.

RCM-101-MW(with external device communication cable + RS232 conversion unit)

RCM-T/TD RCM-E RCM-P

■ Specifications

Surrounding airtemperature/humidity

Surrounding ambience

Weight

Cable length

Display

Approx. 650g

LCD display with21 characters x 16 lines

Temperature 0 to 40°C / Humidity 85% RH or below

Free from corrosive gases. Not subject to significant powder dust.

Approx. 400g

5m

LCD display with 16 characters x 2 lines

Approx. 360g

LCD display with 16 characters x 2 lines

Item RCM-T-TD RCM-E RCM-P

0.3m

5m

5m

Applicable controllerSCON

Applicable controllerSCON

External device communication cableCB-RCA-SIO050

External device communication cableCB-RCA-SIO050

PC software (CD)

PC software (CD)

RS232 conversion adapter RCB-CV-MW

RCM-101-USB(with external device communication cable + USB conversion unit + USB cable)

5m1m

USB cableCB-SEL-USB010

USB conversion adapterRCB-CV-USB

80

105 7.532.5

φ4.8

249.

5

21

6.326.215.1

23.5

43

148.

5

7 (34)72.5

(113.5)

140

2386

ESC

987654

0321

IAI

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

63 64

External Dimensions/Options

■Options

Teaching Pendant

PC Software (Windows Only)

Teaching device offering functions for program/position input, test operation, monitoring, and more.

IA-T-X-J (standard type with connector conversion cable)

IA-T-X (standard type)

IA-T-XD-J (deadman switch type with connector conversion cable)

IA-T-XD (deadman switch type)

IA-T-XA-J (ANSI type with connector conversion cable)

IA-T-XA (ANSI type)

Startup support software equipped with functions for program/position input, test operation, monitoring, and more. Improved debugging functions help you reduce the time required for initial startup.IA-101-X-MW-J (with RS232C cable + connector conversion cable)

IA-101-X-MW (with RS232C cable)

IA-T-X/XD IA-T-XA

■ Specification

Surrounding airtemperature/humidity

Surrounding ambience

Weight

Cable length

Display

Free from corrosive gases. Not subject to significant powder dust.

Temperature 0 to 40°C / Humidity 85% RH or below

Approx. 650 g

4m

LCD display with20 characters x 4 lines

Protected structure conforming to IP54

Approx. 600 g (excluding cable)

5m

LCD display with32 characters x 8 lines

Item IA-T-X/XD IA-T-XA

5m

IA−T−X/XD:4m

IA−T−XA:5m

Conversion cable: CB-SEL-SJ002

0.2m

0.2m

Applicable controllerXSEL-P/PX

Applicable controllerSSEL-C

Connector conversion cable:CB-SEL-SJ002

RS232C cableCB-ST-E1MW050-EB

IA-101-XA-MW (with cable conforming to safety category 4)

IA-101-X-USB (with USB cable)

IA-101-X-USBMW (with USB conversion adapter + cable)

5m

Applicable controllerXSEL-Q/QX

Cable conforming to safety category CB-ST-A1MW050-EB

1m

Applicable controllerSSEL-CDummy plug

DP-3

USB cableCB-SEL-USB010

5m1m

Applicable controllerXSEL-P/PX

RS232C cableCB-ST-E1MW050-EB

USB cableCB-SEL-USB010

USB conversion adapterIA-CV-USB

120

90

265

4528

Applicable controller XSEL-P/Q

Applicablecontroller SSEL-C

Only teaching pendants of version 1.30 or later (or 1.20 or later for the ANSI type) support linear controllers.

Note

Only PC software of version 6.0.0.0 or later supports linear controllers.

Note

80

255

133 58.346.7

Regenerative Resistance Unit

Panel Unit System-memory Backup Battery Absolute-data Backup Battery

This unit returns to heat the regenerative current produced by the motor during deceleration. Use the table on the right to check the total wattage of the actuators you want to operate, and provide one or more regenerative resistance units as required.

REU−1 (XSEL)

REU−2 (SCON/SSEL)

Display unit for checking controller error codes and the program number of the current program.

PU-1 (Cable length: 3 m)

Use this battery if you are using global flags, etc., in your programs and thus want to retain the data even after the power is turned off. (This battery is used with the SSEL.)

AB-5-CS (with case)AB-5 (battery only)

This battery backs up absolute data when an actuator of absolute specification is operated. The absolute-data backup battery is not required for linear servo actuators because all linear servo actuator models are of incremental specification.

AB-5

Dummy Plug USB conversion adapter This plug is connected to the teaching port on an SSEL controller to short the enable circuit, so that the controller can be connected to a PC via a USB cable. (The dummy plug is supplied with PC software IA-101-X-USB.)

This cable is used to connect a controller with USB port (SSEL) to a PC. To connect a controller without USB port (XSEL) to a PC, use the USB conversion adapter to connect the RS232C cable to the USB cable, and connect the USB cable to the USB port on the PC. (Refer to the explanation of PC software IA-101-X-USBMW.)

DP-3

This adapter is used to convert signals received through the RS232 cable or external device communication cable to the format supported by the USB cable.

IA-CV-USB(supplied with IA-101-X-USB)

RCB-CV-USB(supplied with RCM-101-USB)

RS232 conversion adapter

This adapter is used to convert signals received through the external device communication cable (RS485 communication) to the format supported by the RS232 terminal.

RCB-CV-MW(supplied with RCM-101-MW)

USB Cable External Device Communication Cable

CB-SEL-USB010(Cable length: 1 m)

This cable is used to connect an SCON controller to a PC. (The RS232 conversion adapter is needed to connect to the PC.)

CB-RCA-SIO050 (5m)(supplied with RCM-101-MW)

Connector Conversion Cable

This conversion cable is used to connect the D-sub, 25-pin connector for teaching pendant or PC software to the teaching connector (half-pitch) on an SSEL controller.

CB-SEL-SJ002(Cable length: 0.2 m)

Weight

Built-in regenerativeresistor

Unit-controller connectioncable (supplied)

0.9kg

220Ω 80W

CB-ST-REU010 (XSEL)CB-SC-REU010 (SSEL)

■ Reference for Determining the Necessary Number of Regenerative Resistance Units

■ External Dimensions

0

1

2

3

4

5

~200W

~1000W

~1500W

~2000W

Horizontal

~200W

~750W

~800W ~100W

~800W

~1200W

~1600W

~2000W

~2400W

~100W

~400W

~750W

~200W

~600W

~800W

Vertical

* Depending on the operating conditions, more regenerative resistance may be required than what is specified above.

* If you are using an SCON/SSEL and the total wattage suggests that you need two regenerative resistance units, use an REU-1 for the second unit.

φ5

16.6 126

34

5

175

195

186

RB OUT

RB +

RB -

RB +

RB -

RB IN

φ3.2 17

114

43

XSEL XSELSSEL SSELSCON SCON

■ Feature

■ Model

■ Configuration

■ Feature

■ Model

■ Model

■ Configuration

■ Configuration

■ Model■ Configuration

■ Model■ Configuration

PC software (CD)

PC software (CD)

PC software (CD)

PC software (CD)

■ Feature

■ Model

■ Feature

■ Model

■ Feature

■ Model

■ Feature

■ Model

■ Feature

■ Model

■ Feature

■ Model

■ Feature

■ Model

■ Feature

■ Model

■ Feature

■ Model

■ Feature

■ Model

■ Specifications

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

63 64

External Dimensions/Options

■Options

Teaching Pendant

PC Software (Windows Only)

Teaching device offering functions for program/position input, test operation, monitoring, and more.

IA-T-X-J (standard type with connector conversion cable)

IA-T-X (standard type)

IA-T-XD-J (deadman switch type with connector conversion cable)

IA-T-XD (deadman switch type)

IA-T-XA-J (ANSI type with connector conversion cable)

IA-T-XA (ANSI type)

Startup support software equipped with functions for program/position input, test operation, monitoring, and more. Improved debugging functions help you reduce the time required for initial startup.IA-101-X-MW-J (with RS232C cable + connector conversion cable)

IA-101-X-MW (with RS232C cable)

IA-T-X/XD IA-T-XA

■ Specification

Surrounding airtemperature/humidity

Surrounding ambience

Weight

Cable length

Display

Free from corrosive gases. Not subject to significant powder dust.

Temperature 0 to 40°C / Humidity 85% RH or below

Approx. 650 g

4m

LCD display with20 characters x 4 lines

Protected structure conforming to IP54

Approx. 600 g (excluding cable)

5m

LCD display with32 characters x 8 lines

Item IA-T-X/XD IA-T-XA

5m

IA−T−X/XD:4m

IA−T−XA:5m

Conversion cable: CB-SEL-SJ002

0.2m

0.2m

Applicable controllerXSEL-P/PX

Applicable controllerSSEL-C

Connector conversion cable:CB-SEL-SJ002

RS232C cableCB-ST-E1MW050-EB

IA-101-XA-MW (with cable conforming to safety category 4)

IA-101-X-USB (with USB cable)

IA-101-X-USBMW (with USB conversion adapter + cable)

5m

Applicable controllerXSEL-Q/QX

Cable conforming to safety category CB-ST-A1MW050-EB

1m

Applicable controllerSSEL-CDummy plug

DP-3

USB cableCB-SEL-USB010

5m1m

Applicable controllerXSEL-P/PX

RS232C cableCB-ST-E1MW050-EB

USB cableCB-SEL-USB010

USB conversion adapterIA-CV-USB

120

90

265

4528

Applicable controller XSEL-P/Q

Applicablecontroller SSEL-C

Only teaching pendants of version 1.30 or later (or 1.20 or later for the ANSI type) support linear controllers.

Note

Only PC software of version 6.0.0.0 or later supports linear controllers.

Note

80

255

133 58.346.7

Regenerative Resistance Unit

Panel Unit System-memory Backup Battery Absolute-data Backup Battery

This unit returns to heat the regenerative current produced by the motor during deceleration. Use the table on the right to check the total wattage of the actuators you want to operate, and provide one or more regenerative resistance units as required.

REU−1 (XSEL)

REU−2 (SCON/SSEL)

Display unit for checking controller error codes and the program number of the current program.

PU-1 (Cable length: 3 m)

Use this battery if you are using global flags, etc., in your programs and thus want to retain the data even after the power is turned off. (This battery is used with the SSEL.)

AB-5-CS (with case)AB-5 (battery only)

This battery backs up absolute data when an actuator of absolute specification is operated. The absolute-data backup battery is not required for linear servo actuators because all linear servo actuator models are of incremental specification.

AB-5

Dummy Plug USB conversion adapter This plug is connected to the teaching port on an SSEL controller to short the enable circuit, so that the controller can be connected to a PC via a USB cable. (The dummy plug is supplied with PC software IA-101-X-USB.)

This cable is used to connect a controller with USB port (SSEL) to a PC. To connect a controller without USB port (XSEL) to a PC, use the USB conversion adapter to connect the RS232C cable to the USB cable, and connect the USB cable to the USB port on the PC. (Refer to the explanation of PC software IA-101-X-USBMW.)

DP-3

This adapter is used to convert signals received through the RS232 cable or external device communication cable to the format supported by the USB cable.

IA-CV-USB(supplied with IA-101-X-USB)

RCB-CV-USB(supplied with RCM-101-USB)

RS232 conversion adapter

This adapter is used to convert signals received through the external device communication cable (RS485 communication) to the format supported by the RS232 terminal.

RCB-CV-MW(supplied with RCM-101-MW)

USB Cable External Device Communication Cable

CB-SEL-USB010(Cable length: 1 m)

This cable is used to connect an SCON controller to a PC. (The RS232 conversion adapter is needed to connect to the PC.)

CB-RCA-SIO050 (5m)(supplied with RCM-101-MW)

Connector Conversion Cable

This conversion cable is used to connect the D-sub, 25-pin connector for teaching pendant or PC software to the teaching connector (half-pitch) on an SSEL controller.

CB-SEL-SJ002(Cable length: 0.2 m)

Weight

Built-in regenerativeresistor

Unit-controller connectioncable (supplied)

0.9kg

220Ω 80W

CB-ST-REU010 (XSEL)CB-SC-REU010 (SSEL)

■ Reference for Determining the Necessary Number of Regenerative Resistance Units

■ External Dimensions

0

1

2

3

4

5

~200W

~1000W

~1500W

~2000W

Horizontal

~200W

~750W

~800W ~100W

~800W

~1200W

~1600W

~2000W

~2400W

~100W

~400W

~750W

~200W

~600W

~800W

Vertical

* Depending on the operating conditions, more regenerative resistance may be required than what is specified above.

* If you are using an SCON/SSEL and the total wattage suggests that you need two regenerative resistance units, use an REU-1 for the second unit.

φ5

16.6 126

34

5

175

195

186

RB OUT

RB +

RB -

RB +

RB -

RB IN

φ3.2 17

114

43

XSEL XSELSSEL SSELSCON SCON

■ Feature

■ Model

■ Configuration

■ Feature

■ Model

■ Model

■ Configuration

■ Configuration

■ Model■ Configuration

■ Model■ Configuration

PC software (CD)

PC software (CD)

PC software (CD)

PC software (CD)

■ Feature

■ Model

■ Feature

■ Model

■ Feature

■ Model

■ Feature

■ Model

■ Feature

■ Model

■ Feature

■ Model

■ Feature

■ Model

■ Feature

■ Model

■ Feature

■ Model

■ Feature

■ Model

■ Specifications

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

65 66

External Dimensions/Options

■Cable

Motor Cable ■ Model

■ Model

■ Model

CB-XMC-MA□□□ (for large type)CB-X-MA□□□ (for shaft type, small type, flat type, medium type)

Encoder Cable (for Large Type)

CB-X2-PLA□□□

CB-X2-PA□□□

Encoder Cable (for Shaft Type, Small Type, Flat Type, Medium Type)

CB-DS-PIO□□□

L

Controller end

Controller end

4

1

1

4

Wire Color Signal No.

0.75sq

GreenRed

WhiteBlack

PEUVW

1234

WireColorSignal

0.75sq(crimped)

RedWhiteBlackGreen

UVWPE

1234

Actuator end

Actuator end

(10)(20)

(Front view)

(Front view)

(Front view)

(16)

(φ9) (2

1)

(18)

(41)

No.

(41) (14)

(13)

(37)

(15)

(25)

1

9

1

13

14

26

18

10

L

I/O Flat Cable (for SSEL)

I/O Flat Cable (for XSEL)

1B 1A

17B 17A

Flat cable AWG28 (34 cores)

2m

No connector at end

CB-X-PIO□□□LS end

(13)

(41) (14)

(37)

(8)

(15)(1

8)(2

5)

1

9

1

13

14

26

18

10

L

6

1

L

2 1

50 49

I/O Flat Cable (for SCON)

CB-PAC-PIO□□□

*Specify the cable length (L) in □□□. A desired length up to 10 m can be specified. Example) 080 = 8 m

* Specify the cable length (L) in □□□. Example) 080 = 8 m The maximum length is 20 m for the SCON/SSEL and 30 m for the XSEL.

* Specify the cable length (L) in □□□. Example) 080 = 8 m The maximum length is 20 m for the SCON/SSEL and 30 m for the XSEL.

* Specify the cable length (L) in □□□. Example) 080 = 8 m The maximum length is 20 m for the SCON/SSEL and 30 m for the XSEL.

L

B

Half-pitch MIL socket: HIF6-40D-1.27R (Hirose)

20B20A

1B1A

A

L

Plug: 10114-3000PE (Sumitomo 3M)Shell: 10314-52F0-008 (Sumitomo 3M)

Drain wire and braided shielded cable

AWG26(soldered)

−−

White/orangeWhite/greenBrown/blue

Brown/yellowBrown/red

Brown/black−−−

White/blueWhite/yellow

White/redWhite/blackWhite/purpleWhite/grayOrangeGreenPurpleGrayRed

BlackBlue

Yellow−

−−

E24V0VLS

CLEEPOT

RSV−−−

A+A−B+B−Z+Z−

SRD+SRD−BAT+BAT−VCCGNDBKR−BKR+

1011121326252423918191234567814151617202122

Wire Color Signal No.

Connect the shielded cable to the hood via a clamp.

(“White/blue” in the wire color field indicates the band color/insulator color.)

White/blueWhite/yellow

White/redWhite/blackWhite/purpleWhite/gray

E24V0VLS

CLEEPOT

RSV

123456

WireColorSignalNo.

White/blueWhite/yellow

White/redWhite/blackWhite/purpleWhite/gray

--

DrainOrangeGreenPurpleGrayRed

Black-

BlueYellow

AABBZZ--

FGSDSD

BAT+BAT-VCCGND

-BK-BK+

123456789101112131415161718

No. WireColorSignal

AWG26(soldered)

AWG26(soldered)

Drain wire and braided shielded cable

−−−−−−−−−−−

White/blueWhite/yellow

White/redWhite/blackWhite/purpleWhite/grayOrangeGreenPurpleGrayRed

BlackBlue

Yellow−

−−

E24V0VLS

CLEEPOT

RSV−−−

A+A−B+B−Z+Z−

SRD+SRD−BAT+BAT-VCCGNDBKR−BKR+

1011121326252423918191234567814151617202122

White/blueWhite/yellow

White/redWhite/blackWhite/purpleWhite/gray

--

DrainOrangeGreenPurpleGrayRed

Black-

BlueYellow

AABBZZ--

FGSDSD

BAT+BAT-VCCGND

-BK-BK+

123456789101112131415161718

WireColorSignalNo.

AWG26(soldered)

Connect the shielded cable to the hood via a clamp.

(“White/blue” in the wire color field indicates the band color/insulator color.)

AWG26(soldered)

Flat cable, p

ressure-weld

ed

Flat cable, p

ressure-weld

ed

1A1B2A2B3A3B4A4B5A5B6A6B7A7B8A8B9A

Brown 1Red 1

Orange 1Yellow 1Green 1Blue 1

Purple 1Gray 1White 1Black 1

Brown −2Red 2

Orange 2Yellow 2Green 2Blue 2

Purple 2

9B10A10B11A11B12A12B13A13B14A14B15A15B16A16B17A17B

Gray 2White 2Black 2

Brown −3Red 3

Orange 3Yellow 3Green 3Blue 3

Purple 3Gray 3White 3Black 3

Brown −4Red 4

Orange 4Yellow 4

ColorNo. Wire WireColorNo.

1234567891011121314151617

Brown 1Red 1

Orange 1Yellow 1Green 1Blue 1

Purple 1Gray 1White 1Black 1

Brown −2Red 2

Orange 2Yellow 2Green 2Blue 2

Purple 2

35363738394041424344454647484950

Green 4Blue 4

Purple 4Gray4

White 4Black4

Brown −5Red 5

Orange 5Yellow 5Green 5Blue 5

Purple 5Gray 5White 5Black 5

1819202122232425262728293031323334

Gray 2White 2Black 2

Brown −3Red 3

Orange 3Yellow 3Green 3Blue 3

Purple 3Gray 3White 3Black 3

Brown −4Red 4

Orange 4Yellow 4

SCON Pulse-train Control Cable

CB-SC-PIOS□□□

ColorNo. Wire ColorNo. Wire ColorNo. Wire

Flat cable, p

ressure-weld

ed

Flat cable, p

ressure-weld

ed

Flat cable, p

ressure-weld

ed

Brown −1Red −1

Orange −1Yellow −1Green −1Blue −1

Purple −1Gray −1White −1Black −1Brown −2Red −2

Orange −2Yellow −2Green −2Blue −2

Purple −2Gray −2White −2Black −2

Cable colorNo.Signalname

Wire

24V24V

−−

IN0IN1IN2IN3IN4IN5IN6IN7IN8IN9IN10IN11IN12IN13IN14IN15

1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8A9A10A11A12A13A14A15A16A17A18A19A20A

Brown −3Red −3

Orange −3Yellow −3Green −3Blue −3

Purple −3Gray −3White −3Black −3Brown −4Red −4

Orange −4Yellow −4Green −4Blue −4

Purple −4Gray −4White −4Black −4

OUT0OUT1OUT2OUT3OUT4OUT5OUT6OUT7OUT8OUT9OUT10OUT11OUT12OUT13OUT14OUT15

−−

0V0V

1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8B9B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B

Flat cable Ⓐ(pressure-welded)

Flat cable Ⓑ(pressure-welded) AWG28

HIF6-40D-1.27R

Shieldedcable

Connect the shielded cable to a cable clamp.

1234567891011121314

0.2 sq., soldered

Not usedNot used

PP/PPNP/NPAFB/AFBBFB/BFBZFB/ZFBGNDGND

BlackWhite/black

RedWhite/redGreen

White/greenYellow

White/yellowBrown

White/brownBlue

White/blueGray

White/gray

BlackWhite/black

RedWhite/red

GreenWhite/green

YellowWhite/yellow

BrownWhite/brown

BlueWhite/blue

GrayWhite/gray

Shielded cable

No.Wire Color Signal

(φ10

)(φ

10)

(φ9)

Wire Color Signal No.

(Front view)(Front view) Controller end

Actuator end

■ Model

■ Model

■ Model

■ Model

*Specify the cable length (L) in □□□. A desired length up to 10 m can be specified. Example) 080 = 8 m

*Specify the cable length (L) in □□□. A desired length up to 10 m can be specified. Example) 080 = 8 m

*Specify the cable length (L) in □□□. A desired length up to 10 m can be specified. Example) 080 = 8 m

Flat cable AWG28 (50 cores)

No connector at end

No connector at end

No connector at end

Flat cable AWG28 (20 cores) x 2

Cable colorNo.Signalname

Wire

No connector at end

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By:

65 66

External Dimensions/Options

■Cable

Motor Cable ■ Model

■ Model

■ Model

CB-XMC-MA□□□ (for large type)CB-X-MA□□□ (for shaft type, small type, flat type, medium type)

Encoder Cable (for Large Type)

CB-X2-PLA□□□

CB-X2-PA□□□

Encoder Cable (for Shaft Type, Small Type, Flat Type, Medium Type)

CB-DS-PIO□□□

L

Controller end

Controller end

4

1

1

4

Wire Color Signal No.

0.75sq

GreenRed

WhiteBlack

PEUVW

1234

WireColorSignal

0.75sq(crimped)

RedWhiteBlackGreen

UVWPE

1234

Actuator end

Actuator end

(10)(20)

(Front view)

(Front view)

(Front view)

(16)

(φ9) (2

1)

(18)

(41)

No.

(41) (14)

(13)

(37)

(15)

(25)

1

9

1

13

14

26

18

10

L

I/O Flat Cable (for SSEL)

I/O Flat Cable (for XSEL)

1B 1A

17B 17A

Flat cable AWG28 (34 cores)

2m

No connector at end

CB-X-PIO□□□LS end

(13)

(41) (14)

(37)

(8)

(15)

(18)

(25)

1

9

1

13

14

26

18

10

L

6

1

L

2 1

50 49

I/O Flat Cable (for SCON)

CB-PAC-PIO□□□

*Specify the cable length (L) in □□□. A desired length up to 10 m can be specified. Example) 080 = 8 m

* Specify the cable length (L) in □□□. Example) 080 = 8 m The maximum length is 20 m for the SCON/SSEL and 30 m for the XSEL.

* Specify the cable length (L) in □□□. Example) 080 = 8 m The maximum length is 20 m for the SCON/SSEL and 30 m for the XSEL.

* Specify the cable length (L) in □□□. Example) 080 = 8 m The maximum length is 20 m for the SCON/SSEL and 30 m for the XSEL.

L

B

Half-pitch MIL socket: HIF6-40D-1.27R (Hirose)

20B20A

1B1A

A

L

Plug: 10114-3000PE (Sumitomo 3M)Shell: 10314-52F0-008 (Sumitomo 3M)

Drain wire and braided shielded cable

AWG26(soldered)

−−

White/orangeWhite/greenBrown/blue

Brown/yellowBrown/red

Brown/black−−−

White/blueWhite/yellow

White/redWhite/blackWhite/purpleWhite/grayOrangeGreenPurpleGrayRed

BlackBlue

Yellow−

−−

E24V0VLS

CLEEPOT

RSV−−−

A+A−B+B−Z+Z−

SRD+SRD−BAT+BAT−VCCGNDBKR−BKR+

1011121326252423918191234567814151617202122

Wire Color Signal No.

Connect the shielded cable to the hood via a clamp.

(“White/blue” in the wire color field indicates the band color/insulator color.)

White/blueWhite/yellow

White/redWhite/blackWhite/purpleWhite/gray

E24V0VLS

CLEEPOT

RSV

123456

WireColorSignalNo.

White/blueWhite/yellow

White/redWhite/blackWhite/purpleWhite/gray

--

DrainOrangeGreenPurpleGrayRed

Black-

BlueYellow

AABBZZ--

FGSDSD

BAT+BAT-VCCGND

-BK-BK+

123456789101112131415161718

No. WireColorSignal

AWG26(soldered)

AWG26(soldered)

Drain wire and braided shielded cable

−−−−−−−−−−−

White/blueWhite/yellow

White/redWhite/blackWhite/purpleWhite/grayOrangeGreenPurpleGrayRed

BlackBlue

Yellow−

−−

E24V0VLS

CLEEPOT

RSV−−−

A+A−B+B−Z+Z−

SRD+SRD−BAT+BAT-VCCGNDBKR−BKR+

1011121326252423918191234567814151617202122

White/blueWhite/yellow

White/redWhite/blackWhite/purpleWhite/gray

--

DrainOrangeGreenPurpleGrayRed

Black-

BlueYellow

AABBZZ--

FGSDSD

BAT+BAT-VCCGND

-BK-BK+

123456789101112131415161718

WireColorSignalNo.

AWG26(soldered)

Connect the shielded cable to the hood via a clamp.

(“White/blue” in the wire color field indicates the band color/insulator color.)

AWG26(soldered)

Flat cable, p

ressure-weld

ed

Flat cable, p

ressure-weld

ed

1A1B2A2B3A3B4A4B5A5B6A6B7A7B8A8B9A

Brown 1Red 1

Orange 1Yellow 1Green 1Blue 1

Purple 1Gray 1White 1Black 1

Brown −2Red 2

Orange 2Yellow 2Green 2Blue 2

Purple 2

9B10A10B11A11B12A12B13A13B14A14B15A15B16A16B17A17B

Gray 2White 2Black 2

Brown −3Red 3

Orange 3Yellow 3Green 3Blue 3

Purple 3Gray 3White 3Black 3

Brown −4Red 4

Orange 4Yellow 4

ColorNo. Wire WireColorNo.

1234567891011121314151617

Brown 1Red 1

Orange 1Yellow 1Green 1Blue 1

Purple 1Gray 1White 1Black 1

Brown −2Red 2

Orange 2Yellow 2Green 2Blue 2

Purple 2

35363738394041424344454647484950

Green 4Blue 4

Purple 4Gray4

White 4Black4

Brown −5Red 5

Orange 5Yellow 5Green 5Blue 5

Purple 5Gray 5White 5Black 5

1819202122232425262728293031323334

Gray 2White 2Black 2

Brown −3Red 3

Orange 3Yellow 3Green 3Blue 3

Purple 3Gray 3White 3Black 3

Brown −4Red 4

Orange 4Yellow 4

SCON Pulse-train Control Cable

CB-SC-PIOS□□□

ColorNo. Wire ColorNo. Wire ColorNo. Wire

Flat cable, p

ressure-weld

ed

Flat cable, p

ressure-weld

ed

Flat cable, p

ressure-weld

ed

Brown −1Red −1

Orange −1Yellow −1Green −1Blue −1

Purple −1Gray −1White −1Black −1Brown −2Red −2

Orange −2Yellow −2Green −2Blue −2

Purple −2Gray −2White −2Black −2

Cable colorNo.Signalname

Wire

24V24V

−−

IN0IN1IN2IN3IN4IN5IN6IN7IN8IN9IN10IN11IN12IN13IN14IN15

1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8A9A10A11A12A13A14A15A16A17A18A19A20A

Brown −3Red −3

Orange −3Yellow −3Green −3Blue −3

Purple −3Gray −3White −3Black −3Brown −4Red −4

Orange −4Yellow −4Green −4Blue −4

Purple −4Gray −4White −4Black −4

OUT0OUT1OUT2OUT3OUT4OUT5OUT6OUT7OUT8OUT9OUT10OUT11OUT12OUT13OUT14OUT15

−−

0V0V

1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8B9B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B

Flat cable Ⓐ(pressure-welded)

Flat cable Ⓑ(pressure-welded) AWG28

HIF6-40D-1.27R

Shieldedcable

Connect the shielded cable to a cable clamp.

123456789

1011121314

0.2 sq., soldered

Not usedNot used

PP/PPNP/NPAFB/AFBBFB/BFBZFB/ZFBGNDGND

BlackWhite/black

RedWhite/redGreen

White/greenYellow

White/yellowBrown

White/brownBlue

White/blueGray

White/gray

BlackWhite/black

RedWhite/red

GreenWhite/green

YellowWhite/yellow

BrownWhite/brown

BlueWhite/blue

GrayWhite/gray

Shielded cable

No.Wire Color Signal

(φ10

)(φ

10)

(φ9)

Wire Color Signal No.

(Front view)(Front view) Controller end

Actuator end

■ Model

■ Model

■ Model

■ Model

*Specify the cable length (L) in □□□. A desired length up to 10 m can be specified. Example) 080 = 8 m

*Specify the cable length (L) in □□□. A desired length up to 10 m can be specified. Example) 080 = 8 m

*Specify the cable length (L) in □□□. A desired length up to 10 m can be specified. Example) 080 = 8 m

Flat cable AWG28 (50 cores)

No connector at end

No connector at end

No connector at end

Flat cable AWG28 (20 cores) x 2

Cable colorNo.Signalname

Wire

No connector at end

ELECTROMATEToll Free Phone (877) SERVO98

Toll Free Fax (877) SERV099www.electromate.com

[email protected]

Sold & Serviced By: